Sony Ericsson PDW 530P User Manual

PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER  
PDW-510/510P  
PDW-530/530P  
OPERATION MANUAL [English]  
1st Edition  
UTSÄTTAS FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM  
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.  
For the customers in the USA and Canada  
• RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
For the customers in the USA  
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.  
You can help preserve our environment  
by returning your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and recycling  
location nearest you.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the  
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur  
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can  
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures;  
For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable  
batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or visit  
http://www.rbrc.org/  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion  
batteries.  
• RECYCLING NICKEL METAL HYDRIDE BATTERIES  
Nickel metal hydride batteries are  
recyclable.  
You can help preserve our environment  
by returning your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and recycling  
location nearest you.  
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
– Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different  
from that to which the receiver is connected.  
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable  
batteries, call toll free1-800-822-8837, or visit  
http://www.rbrc.org/  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to  
operate this equipment.  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion  
batteries.  
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual  
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the  
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of  
FCC Rules.  
For the customers in Europe  
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC  
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the  
European Community.  
For the customers in the USA  
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this product may  
be regulated if sold in the USA. For disposal or recycling  
information, please contact your local authorities or the  
Electronics Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org http://  
www.eiae.org ).  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex. TV  
studio).  
3
AVERTISSEMENT  
ATTENTION  
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’incendie ou  
d’électrocution, ne pas exposer cet  
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.  
Comme le rayon laser utilisé dans ce Camescope de  
disques pour professionnels est dangereux pour les  
yeux, ne pas essayer de démonter le coffret. Faire  
effectuer l’entretien uniquement par un personnel  
qualifié.  
Afin d’écarter tout risque d’électrocution,  
garder le coffret fermé. Ne confier  
l’entretien de l’appareil qu’à un personnel  
qualifié.  
ATTENTION  
L’emploi d’instruments optiques avec ce produit  
augmentera les risques pour les yeux.  
Précaution  
L’emploi de commandes ou ajustements ou l’exécution de  
procédures autres que celles spécifiées ici peut provoquer  
une exposition dangereuse au rayonnement.  
Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au Canada.  
• RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX IONS DE  
LITHIUM  
Cet camescope de disques pour professionnels est classé  
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1.  
Propriétés de la diode laser  
Longueur d’onde: 403 à 410 nm  
Durée d’émission: Continue  
Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium  
sont recyclables.  
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver  
l’environnement en rapportant les piles  
usées dans un point de collection et  
recyclage le plus proche.  
Puissance de sortie laser: 65 mW (maxi de crête  
d’impulsion), 35 mW (maxi d'ondes entretenues)  
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des  
accumulateurs, téléphonez au numéro gratuit  
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada uniquement), ou  
visitez http://www.rbrc.org/  
Cette étiquette est placée à  
l’intérieur du panneau  
extérieur de l’appareil.  
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des accumulateurs aux ions  
de lithium qui sont endommagés ou qui fuient.  
• RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS À HYDRURE  
MÉTALLIQUE DE NICKEL  
Les accumulateurs à hydrure métallique  
de nickel sont recyclables.  
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver  
l’environnement en rapportant les piles  
usées dans un point de collection et  
recyclage le plus proche.  
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des  
accumulateurs, téléphonez au numéro gratuit  
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada uniquement), ou  
visitez http://www.rbrc.org/  
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des accumulateurs aux ions  
de lithium qui sont endommagés ou qui fuient.  
4
Pour les clients européens  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la Directive  
sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC) (89/336/CEE)  
émise par la Commission de la Communauté européenne.  
La conformité à cette directive implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes :  
EN55103-1 : Interférences électromagnétiques (émission)  
EN55103-2 : Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les environnements  
électromagnétiques suivants :  
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère),  
E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé, ex.  
studio de télévision).  
5
WARNUNG  
VORSICHT  
Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines  
elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, darf  
das Gerät weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit  
ausgesetzt werden.  
Die Laserstrahlung im Innern ist augenschädlich.  
Deshalb den Professional Disc Camcorder nicht öffnen/  
zerlegen. Wartungsarbeiten ausschließlich  
qualifiziertem Fachpersonal überlassen.  
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu  
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht  
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie  
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem  
Fachpersonal.  
VORSICHT  
Der Einsatz von optischen Hilfen verstärkt die Gefahr  
von Augenschäden.  
Vorsicht  
Bei Betätigung von Bedien- und Einstellteilen oder  
Ausführung von Bedienvorgängen, die nicht ausdrücklich in  
dieser Bedienungsanleitung aufgeführt sind, droht u.U. die  
Einwirkung gefährlicher Laserstrahlung.  
GEFAHR  
Bei geöffnetem Laufwerk und beschädigter oder deaktivierter  
Verriegelung tritt ein unsichtbarer Laserstrahl aus.  
Direkter Kontark mit dem Laserstrahl ist unbedingt zu  
vermeiden.  
Dieses Gerät ist als CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT eingestuft.  
Eigenschaften der Laserdiode  
Wellenlänge: 403 bis 410 nm  
Emissionsdauer. Ununterbrochen  
Laser-Ausgangsleistung: 65 mW (max. Impulsspitze), 35  
mW (max. Dauerstrich)  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt die  
EMV-Richtlinie (89/336/EWG) der EG-Kommission.  
Angewandte Normen:  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störaussendung)  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störfestigkeit),  
Dieser Aufkleber befindet  
sich hinter der  
für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen: E1  
(Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem  
Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien) und  
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio)  
Außenabdeckung des  
Geräts.  
6
ATTENZIONE  
CAUTELA  
Per evitare il pericolo di incendi o scosse  
elettriche, non esporre l’apparecchio alla  
pioggia o all’umidità.  
Poiché il raggio laser impiegato in questo camcorder di  
dischi professionale è dannoso alla vista, non tentare di  
smontare il rivestimento. Per la manutenzione rivolgersi  
esclusivamente a personale qualificato.  
Per evitare scosse elettriche, non aprire  
l’apparecchio.  
Per le riparazioni, rivolgersi solo a  
personale qualificato.  
CAUTELA  
L’uso di strumenti ottici con questo prodotto aumenta il  
rischio per la vista.  
Cautela  
L’uso di comandi o regolazioni o l’esecuzione di procedimenti  
diversi da quelli specificati in questo manuale possono  
causare esposizione a radiazioni pericolose.  
Per i clienti in Europa  
Questo prodotto recante il marchio CE è conforme sia alla  
direttiva sulla compatibilità elettromagnetica (EMC) (89/336/  
CEE) emesse dalla Commissione della Comunità Europea.  
La conformità a queste direttive implica la conformità alle  
seguenti normative europee:  
EN55103-1: Interferenza elettromagnetica (Emissione)  
EN55103-2: Sensibilità ai disturbi elettromagnetici (Immunità)  
Questo prodotto è destinato all’uso nei seguenti ambienti  
elettromagnetici:  
Questo camcorder di dischi professionale è classificato come  
PRODOTTO LASER CLASSE 1.  
Proprietà del laser a diodo  
Lunghezza d’onda: da 403 a 410 nm  
Durata emissione: Continua  
Potenza d’emissione del laser: 65 mW (mass. a picco di  
impulso), 35 mW (mass. di CW)  
E1 (residenziali), E2 (commerciali e industriali leggeri), E3  
(esterni urbani) e E4 (ambienti EMC controllati, ad esempio  
studi televisivi).  
Questa etichetta si trova  
all’interno del pannello  
esterno dell’unità.  
7
ADVERTENCIA  
CAUTION  
Para evitar el riesgo de incendios o  
electrocución, no exponga la unidad a la  
lluvia ni a la humedad.  
Como el rayo láser utilizado en este grabador de discos  
profesional es peligroso para los ojos, no trate de  
desarmar la caja. Solicite el servicio sólo al personal  
cualificado.  
Para evitar descargas eléctricas, no abra el  
aparato. Solicite asistencia técnica  
únicamente a personal especializado.  
CAUTION  
El uso de instrumentos ópticos con este producto  
aumentará el peligro a los ojos.  
Precaución  
La utilización de controles o ajustes, o la realización de  
procedimientos no especificados aquí pueden resultar en la  
exposición a radiación peligrosa.  
Para los clientes de Europa  
Este grabador de discos profesional está clasificado como  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.  
Este producto cumple con las directivas de compatibilidad  
electromagnética (89/336/CEE) de la Comisión Europea.  
El cumplimiento de estas directivas implica la conformidad  
con los siguientes estándares europeos:  
Propiedades del diodo láser  
Longitud de onda: 403 a 410 nm  
Duración de la emisión: Continua  
Potencia de salida láser: 65 mW (máx. de pico de pulso),  
35 mW (máx. de onda continua)  
• EN55103-1: Interferencia electromagnética (Emisión)  
• EN55103-2: Susceptibilidad electromagnética (Inmunidad)  
Este producto está ha sido diseñado para utilizarse en los  
entornos electromagnéticos siguientes:  
E1 (zona residencial), E2 (zona comercial e industrial ligera),  
E3 (exteriores urbanos), y E4 (entorno con EMC controlada,  
p. ej., estudio de televisión).  
Esta etiqueta se encuentra  
en el interior del panel  
exterior de la unidad.  
8
9
10  
Table of Contents  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the  
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on the Color  
3-4 Recording Video Signals from External  
3-4-1 Recording a DV Stream From External  
1-1-1 Principal Differences Between the  
PDW-510/510P and PDW-530/530P15  
1-1-3 Features of the Optical Disc Drive  
(VDR) ..............................................16  
3-4-2 Recording Analog Composite Signals  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback  
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs  
5-1 Setting the Recording Format (PDW-  
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the  
5-3-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode and Shutter  
Speed................................................65  
5-4 Changing the Reference Value for  
5-5-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of  
3-1-1 Discs Used for Recording and Playback  
CH1/CH2 Connectors ......................70  
5-5-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of  
the Front Microphone ......................71  
11  
5-6-2 Saving the Actual Time in the Time  
Code.................................................73  
7-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and  
7-1-2 Saving User Menu Data to the “Memory  
Stick”..............................................104  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder  
6-2-1 Layout of the Status Display on the  
Viewfinder Screen ...........................84  
6-2-3 Display Modes and Setting Change  
Messages..........................................87  
6-2-6 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on  
the Color Bars ..................................89  
6-2-8 Displaying the Status Confirmation  
Windows ..........................................91  
6-2-9 Confirming the Image of the Return  
Video Signal in the Viewfinder .......92  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
7-1-3 Loading saved data from a “Memory  
Stick”..............................................106  
7-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder  
Reference File ................................111  
7-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page  
8-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation Due to an  
8-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer Ultralight  
8-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder Focus and  
6-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN  
Selector Positions.............................94  
6-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature Manually  
95  
8-2-5 Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder  
8-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable Tuner (for a  
6-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White  
Balance Setting ................................96  
6-3-5 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN 1/2/3/4  
Switches...........................................96  
6-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the Internal  
Clock................................................98  
8-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio  
12  
14  
Overview  
1
Chapter  
PDW-530/530P recording format and internal optical  
filters  
1-1 Features  
Recording DVCAM  
format  
Video  
25 Mbps  
DVCAM format  
compatible  
recording  
1)  
Audio  
16 bits, 48 kHz,  
4 channels  
The PDW-510/510P/530/530P is a camcorder for ENG  
2)  
2
and EFP , in which a color video camera using / -inch  
3
Recording 85 minutes  
time  
high-definition CCDs of a 16:9 aspect ratio and a  
Professional Disc drive are combined integrally. The  
camera’s CCDs have approximately 1,000,000 picture  
elements (pixels) (the number of effective pixels:  
approximately 500,000).  
This unit adds a range of new functionality exploiting the  
capabilities of the optical disc to the established high  
image quality and resistance to vibration, dust, and  
moisture of the Betacam SP/SX camcorders.  
MPEG IMX Video  
compatible  
recording  
MPEG IMX  
compatible recording  
(4:2:2 high image  
quality video  
recording using  
MPEG2 intra frames)  
1)  
Audio  
16 bits or 24 bits  
48 kHz sampling  
4 channels  
1) ENG: Electronic News Gathering  
2) EFP: Electronic Field Production  
Recording 50 Mbps: 45 minutes  
time  
40 Mbps: 55 minutes  
30 Mbps: 68 minutes  
1-1-1 Principal Differences Between  
the PDW-510/510P and PDW-  
530/530P  
Optical  
filters  
Separate CC filters and ND filters; two filters  
can be used simultaneously  
1) For analog audio input, the effective bit length is maximum 20 bits.  
There are the following differences between the PDW-  
510/510P and PDW-530/530P in the specifications of  
recording format, internal optical filters, and so on.  
The following characteristics are common to the PDW-  
510/510P and PDW-530/530P.  
1-1-2 Camera Features  
PDW-510/510P recording format and internal optical  
filters  
Recording DVCAM  
Video  
25 Mbps  
DVCAM format  
2
/ -inch Power HAD EX CCDs  
3
format  
compatible  
recording  
2
The three high sensitivity, low smear / -inch Power  
HAD EX CCDs provide a high image quality which is at  
Audio  
16 bits, 48 kHz,  
4 channels  
3
1)  
the top of its class for a standard definition camcorder.  
• The unit is switchable between a 16:9 aspect ratio wide  
image and 4:3 standard aspect ratio.  
Recording 85 minutes  
time  
Optical  
filters  
Single integrated filter system for CC (color  
correction) and ND (neutral density)  
• You can select an interlaced scan mode or progressive  
2)  
scan mode (30 fps (frames per second) for the PDW-  
510/530, 25 fps for the PDW-510P/530P).  
1-1 Features  
15  
           
• With the optional CBK-FC01 Pull Down Board  
installed, a 24 fps progressive scan video can be  
recorded subjected to pull-down, providing imaging  
quality close to that of film. (PDW-510/530 only)  
Saving and recalling settings in a “Memory  
Stick”  
Using an “Memory Stick” , you can save menu settings  
3)  
1)  
for particular shooting conditions, for recall as required.  
1) Abbreviation of “Power Hole-Accumulated Diode.” “Power HAD” is a  
registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
2) More precisely, 29.97 fps  
1) “Memory Stick” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
3) More precisely, 23.98 fps  
High-functionality viewfinder  
The 2-inch monochrome viewfinder allows accurate  
focusing.  
The switch settings, automatic black balance and white  
balance items, status, warnings and so on appear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Camera signal processing for high image  
quality shooting  
• The 12-bit A/D converter provides high image quality,  
stability, and reliability.  
• The high-performance electronic shutter allows you to  
1)  
select the extended clear scan mode (ECS ) and high  
2)  
1-1-3 Features of the Optical Disc  
Drive (VDR)  
vertical resolution mode (EVS ), to obtain clear video  
shooting.  
1) ECS: Extended Clear Scan  
2) EVS: Super Enhanced Vertical Definition System  
Recording and playback in clip units  
Each time you start and stop recording, this creates an  
independent clip. During playback, you can jump to any  
clip, to check the recorded video.  
Shooting functions to cope with different  
shooting conditions  
• During recording, material is always written to unused  
parts of the disc. Therefore, even when playing back  
between shooting sessions, there is no danger of  
inadvertently overwriting the previous recording.  
• Immediately after recording, you can delete clips you  
decide not to keep, allowing efficient use of the available  
disc capacity.  
1
• The slow shutter function (up to / second) allows  
2
shooting under very poor lighting conditions.  
• You can easily recall sets of adjustment values from  
memory, to match the particular lighting conditions.  
• The ATW function provides automatic white balance  
adjustment in response to changing lighting conditions.  
1)  
TM 2)  
• The TruEye  
process yields distortion-free video,  
even with high intensity colors.  
• The TURBO GAIN button enables an instantaneous  
boost of the video gain to the maximum 48 dB.  
Wide range of metadata recording  
Together with the recorded video and audio, a variety of  
additional information is recorded as metadata on the disc.  
• Using simultaneous recording of proxi AV data (low rate  
video and audio: video around 1.5 Mbps, and each audio  
channel 64 kbps), high-speed transfer to an external  
editor or video and audio transfer over a low bandwidth  
network is possible.  
• It is also possible to record a variety of metadata such as  
a camera ID, disc number, scene number, and so on.  
Such metadata offers a great advantage when searching  
for data in subsequent processes.  
1) ATW: Auto Tracing White balance  
2) TruEye: “TruEye” is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Freeze mix function  
This allows a still image from the previously captured  
video to be aligned with the video output from the camera.  
Thus you can adjust the camera position to get exactly the  
same framing for new shooting.  
Wide range of menu settings  
The menus provide the following operations, amongst  
others.  
• Status display, message, and marker display settings  
• Camera adjustment settings  
• Switch function assignment  
Picture cache recording  
Video and audio for a maximum of 10 seconds is always  
held in memory, so that when you start recording, it is  
possible to record from just before the REC START button  
was pressed.  
• “Memory Stick” operations  
You can also assign any settings to the USER menu, to  
create customized menus.  
Time-lapse video (intermittent recording)  
function  
You can record video intermittently, capturing any number  
of frames at any desired time interval.  
16  
1-1 Features  
   
1) You can use PDZ-1 (logging software supplied with the PDW-1500,  
PDW-V1 and so on), or XPRI Meta Station (nonlinear editing software  
supplied with XDCAM support).  
Scene selection function  
The scene selection function allows you to select required  
clips only, and play them back in any order.  
Remote control connectors  
By connecting an optional RM-B150/B750 or similar  
remote control unit, you can control the shooting functions  
of this unit externally.  
High reliability under tough operating  
conditions  
With similar resistance to vibration and dust as a tape-  
based camcorder, this unit can be relied on just like a  
conventional unit.  
Function extension interface  
• Installing the optional CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board  
enables SDI signal output from the VIDEO OUT  
connectors.  
1-1-4 Input and Outputs  
• By installing the optional CBK-SC01 Analog Composite  
Input Board, a composite video signal input to the  
GENLOCK connector can be recorded on this unit.  
• An extension connector can be attached to the battery  
attachment on the rear panel, to allow various camera  
adapters to be fitted.  
Range of audio inputs and outputs  
• A super-cardioid directional monaural microphone with  
external power supply is fitted as standard. By changing  
the connector (service component replacement), a stereo  
microphone can be fitted.  
• The optional slot-in type WRR-855A/855B UHF  
Synthesized Tuner Unit can be installed in the unit.  
• The two AUDIO IN connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) on the  
rear panel of the unit can be switched to line input,  
microphone input, or +48V external power, and also to  
AES/EBU digital audio inputs (maximum 24 bits).  
• When audio cables are connected to the two AUDIO IN  
connectors (XLR type, 3-pin) on the rear panel of the  
unit, an automatic detection function forces the  
recording of the audio input signals from these  
connectors as channels 1 and 2.  
1-1-5 Other Functions  
Usability-oriented design  
• There is more space around the rear panel connectors  
than on previous models, making cable connections and  
switch operations easier.  
• The adjustment range of the shoulder pad in the front to  
rear direction is increased, making it easier to ensure  
proper balance when using the unit.  
• The AUDIO OUT connectors (XLR type, 5-pin) provide  
two channels of audio output.  
2.5-inch color LCD panel  
The side of the unit has an LCD that can be switched to  
show the following images and data.  
• Status information, including audio level meters and  
timecode  
• Thumbnails of the video recorded on the Professional  
Disc  
• A playback image of the video recorded on the  
Professional Disc  
• The camera image  
(i.LINK) connector  
The i.LINK interface enables data transfers with other DV  
devices, as follows.  
• When the camcorder recording format is set to DVCAM  
(PDW-530/530P only), you can record a DV stream  
input from an external DV device to the optical disc  
drive in this unit. (Audio data is converted to the  
recording standard for this unit, then recorded.)  
• You can output a DV stream (on the PDW-530/530P,  
this can also be done in IMX mode), and send to a DSR-  
DU1 hard disc recorder (not supplied) or other DV  
recording device, to act as a back-up recording when  
carrying out recording and stop operations on this unit.  
• When the camcorder is connected to a computer with an  
i.LINK connection, you can use DV stream input and  
output together with nonlinear editing software that  
supports the DV format.  
Monochrome LCD panel  
Even when this unit is powered off, the timecode,  
remaining disc capacity, battery capacity, and other status  
information appears on the monochrome LCD. (This  
requires either a battery loaded or a DC power supply  
connected.)  
1)  
Instant operation assignable switches  
Two switches provided on the side panel and on the top of  
the grip, respectively, can be assigned to any functions, by  
a menu operation.  
By using application software that supports the  
XDCAM series, you can read and write video, audio,  
and metadata recorded on the Professional Disc, with  
random access.  
1-1 Features  
17  
       
Furthermore, another control (the TURBO GAIN button)  
can also be used as an assignable switch.  
Alarm function  
If a fault is detected on the optical disc drive, or if the disc  
or battery capacity is low, this is notified by warning  
indicators and audible alarms.  
SMPTE (PDW-510/530)/EBU (PDW-510P/  
530P) color bars, and 1 kHz reference  
signal output  
Adjustment of a color monitor or external audio device is  
1)  
easy. Color bars for an SNG uplink are also provided.  
1) SNG: Satellite News Gathering  
Viewfinder height adjustable  
In addition to the front to rear and left to right directions,  
the viewfinder can be adjusted vertically in two steps.  
18  
1-1 Features  
1-2 Example of System Configuration  
The diagram below shows a typical configuration of the  
camcorder for ENG and EFP.  
For more information about the fittings, connections, or  
use of additional equipment and accessories, see Chapter  
8 as well as the operation manuals for the connected  
equipment.  
Viewfinder-related equipment  
AC power supply  
Name / Purpose Magnification Part No.  
Name / Purpose  
AC Adaptor  
Part No.  
Fog-proof filter  
Lens assembly  
Lens assembly  
Lens assembly  
1-547-341-11  
AC-550/550CE  
AC-DN2B  
–2.8 D to +2.0 D A-8262-537-A  
–3.6 D to –0.8 D A-8262-538-A  
–3.6 D to +0.4 D A-8267-737-A  
–2.4 D to +0.5 D A-8314-798-A  
AC Adaptor  
Battery  
Name / Purpose Part No.  
Lens assembly  
(3 × magnification)  
Battery Charger BC-M150/M50  
1)  
BP-IL75/GL95/  
M100  
Battery Pack  
Connection through i.LINK interface  
1) BP-L40/M50 cannot be used.  
Devices with a DV connector (DSR-DU1 etc.)  
Camera adaptor  
Extension board  
Name / Purpose  
Part No.  
Name / Purpose  
Part No.  
CBK-SD01  
The input of the audio  
channels 3/4 and the  
SDI output  
CA-701  
SDI Output Board  
Composite Input Board CBK-SC01  
2)  
Pull Down Board  
CBK-FC01  
CCZ (26-pin) output/  
analog composite/SDI  
input  
CA-702/702P  
2) For PDW-510/530 only  
Audio signal source  
“Memory Stick”  
External microphone ECM-672 or similar  
microphone  
RM-B150/B750 Remote  
Control Unit  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
Audio equipment  
Video monitor for color image  
check during shooting  
WRR-862 UHF Portable Tuner  
WRR-855 series UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
CCXA-53 audio cable  
XLR 5-pin connector for stereo  
microphone (service part)  
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer  
1-2 Example of System Configuration  
19  
   
1-3 Precautions  
Use and Storage  
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body  
warped.  
After use  
Always turn off the power.  
Before storing the unit for a long period  
Remove the battery pack.  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the  
unit in the following places.  
• Places subject to temperature extremes  
• Very damp places  
• Places subject to severe vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications  
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and  
interference with audio and video signals.  
It is recommended that the portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
Note on laser beams  
Laser beams may damage the CCDs. If you shoot a scene  
that includes a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser  
beam be directed into the lens of the camera.  
Use at a high temperature  
If the unit is used at a high temperature, white flecks may  
appear on the screen.  
20  
1-3 Precautions  
   
1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual  
The supplied CR-ROM includes versions of the Operation  
Manual for the PDW-510/510P/530/530P in English,  
Japanese, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Chinese.  
Note  
If you lose the CD-ROM disc or become unable to  
read its content, for example because of a hardware  
failure, you can do one of the following.  
• You can purchase a new CD-ROM disc to replace one  
that has been lost or damaged. Contact your Sony service  
representative.  
1-4-1 CD-ROM System  
Requirements  
• You can purchase printed versions of the operation  
manuals. Contact your Sony service representative.  
When ordering, be sure to specify the part number of the  
manual you want.  
The following are required to access the supplied CD-  
ROM disc.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium CPU  
- Installed memory: 64 MB or more  
- CD-ROM drive: ×8 or faster  
Part No.  
Models covered  
• Monitor: Monitor supporting resolution of 800 × 600 or  
higher  
3-805-948-0X  
PDW-510/510P/530/530P  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows Millennium  
Edition, Windows 2000 Service Pack 2, Windows XP  
Professional or Windows XP Home Edition  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its  
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.  
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems  
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.  
When these requirements are not met, access to the CD-  
ROM disc may be slow, or not possible at all.  
1-4-2 Preparations  
One of the following programs must be installed on your  
computer in order to use the operation manuals contained  
on the CD-ROM disc.  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 or higher  
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Note  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it from  
the following URL:  
http://www.adobe.com/  
1-4-3 Reading the CD-ROM Manual  
To read the operation manual contained on the CD-ROM  
disc, do the following.  
1
2
Insert the CD-ROM disc in your CD-ROM drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your browser.  
If it does not appear automatically in the browser,  
double-click the index.htm file on the CD-ROM disc.  
Select and click the operation manual that you want to  
read.  
This opens the PDF file of the operation manual.  
1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual  
21  
       
22  
1-4 Using the CD-ROM Manual  
Locations and Functions  
of Parts and Controls  
2
Chapter  
2-1 Power Supply  
1 Battery attachment  
2 DC IN connector  
3 POWER switch  
4 LIGHT switch  
a Battery attachment  
d LIGHT switch  
This determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT  
connector is turned on and off.  
AUTO: When the switch on the video light is in the on  
position, putting the camcorder in recording mode  
turns the video light on automatically. When using the  
auto interval recording mode, the video light is  
automatically turned on immediately before recording  
starts.  
Attach a BP-IL75/GL95/M100 battery pack.  
Furthermore, by attaching an AC-DN2B AC Adaptor, you  
can operate the camcorder from AC power.  
Note  
If you mount other than the recommended battery pack in  
the camcorder, the operation may be unstable when  
starting or ending recording or playback.  
MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off  
manually, using its own switch.  
b DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)  
To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply,  
connect an AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor with the DC  
output cable supplied with the adaptor.  
Note  
If you use other than the recommended battery pack in the  
camcorder, the video light may not operate.  
c POWER switch  
This switch turns the main power supply on and off.  
2-1 Power Supply  
23  
                 
2-2 Accessory Attachments  
1 Shoulder strap posts  
2 Light shoe  
3 LIGHT connector  
4 Lens mount  
5 Lens locking lever  
6 Lens mount cap  
7 LENS connector  
8 Tripod mount  
9 Shoulder pad  
Lens cable clamp  
a Shoulder strap posts  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap to these posts.  
h Tripod mount  
When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod  
adaptor (not supplied).  
i Shoulder pad  
You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by  
raising up the shoulder pad locking lever. Do this to ensure  
the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on  
your shoulder.  
b Light shoe  
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light to this  
shoe.  
c LIGHT connector (2-pin, female)  
Connect the cable of an Anton Bauer Ultralight System  
attached to the light shoe. The system operates with lights  
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of  
50 W.  
d Lens mount (special bayonet mount)  
Use this for mounting the lens.  
e Lens locking lever  
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens  
mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.  
f Lens mount cap  
Remove this cap by pushing up the lens locking lever.  
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for  
protection from dust.  
g LENS connector (12-pin)  
Fit the lens cable to this connector. Contact your Sony  
representative for more information about the lens you can  
use.  
24  
2-2 Accessory Attachments  
                     
2-3 Audio Functions  
8 Built-in speaker  
1 Microphone  
2 MIC IN connector  
4 EARPHONE jack (rear)  
7 ALARM volume control  
3 MIC LEVEL control  
6 MONITOR volume control  
5 MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
4 EARPHONE jack (front)  
Audio functions (1)  
a Microphone  
This is a super-cardioid directional monaural microphone  
with an external power supply (+48 V) system.  
e MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
These switches together determine the channel selection  
for the audio monitor output.  
b MIC IN (microphone input) connector (XLR type,  
3-pin, female)  
Connect the supplied microphone to this connector. A  
microphone other than the supplied one may also be  
connected as long as it can operate with the power (+48 V)  
supplied from this connector.  
MONITOR switch  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
By fitting a 5-pin connector (service part), you can also use  
a stereo microphone.  
MONITOR switch and CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch  
c MIC (microphone) LEVEL control  
This control adjusts the audio level of the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch:  
This determines a pair of audio channels to be selectable  
with the MONITOR switch.  
d EARPHONE jack (front) (monaural, minijack) /  
EARPHONE jack (rear) (monaural/stereo  
switchable, minijack)  
You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and  
playback sound during playback. Plugging an earphone  
into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker.  
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound  
through the earphone.  
You can use the rear EARPHONE jack for stereo output,  
by setting the HEADPHONE OUT item in the AUDIO-1  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu to “STREO”. You can  
also connect a monaural earphone to the front jack and a  
monaural/stereo earphone set to the rear jack  
simultaneously.  
CH-1/2 position: channels 1 and 2  
CH-3/4 position: channels 3 and 4  
The signals output from the AUDIO OUT connector and  
EARPHONE jacks also depend on the setting of this  
switch.  
MONITOR switch:  
This selects the audio monitor channels output to the  
monaural earphone or speaker, depending on the setting of  
the CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switch.  
2-3 Audio Functions  
25  
               
CH-1/2CH-3/4 MONITOR Audio output  
switch  
position  
switch  
position  
CH-1/2  
CH-1  
MIX  
Audio channel 1  
Mix sound of channels 1 and 2  
Audio channel 2  
Minimum  
Maximum  
CH-2  
CH-3  
MIX  
CH-3/4  
Audio channel 3  
ALARM volume control  
Mix sound of channels 3 and 4  
Audio channel 4  
CH-4  
h Built-in speaker  
During recording, the speaker can be used for monitoring  
the E-E sound, and during playback for monitoring  
1)  
f MONITOR volume control  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone volume for  
sounds other than the alarm sound. At the minimum  
position, no sound can be heard.  
playback sound. The speaker also sounds alarms to  
reinforce visual warnings.  
The output level of the speaker can be lowered by  
changing the setting of the SP ATT LEVEL item on the  
AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
If you connect an earphone to the EARPHONE jack, the  
speaker is automatically muted.  
g ALARM volume control  
This control adjusts the speaker or earphone alarm volume.  
At the minimum position, no sound can be heard.  
However, if in the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu the MIN ALARM VOL item is  
set to”SET”, the alarm tone is audible even when this  
volume control is at the minimum position.  
information about alarms.  
1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio  
signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal  
electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.  
THUMBNAIL  
SEL/SET  
9 LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls  
ESSENCE MARK  
S.SEL  
SUB CLIP  
0 AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches  
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
qa AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 switches  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
qs LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selectors  
qd +48 V/OFFf switches  
qf AUDIO OUT connector  
qg AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors  
qh DC OUT 12V connector  
Audio functions (2)  
26  
2-3 Audio Functions  
     
i LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel-1 and  
channel-2 recording level) controls  
These controls adjust the audio levels of channels 1 and 2  
m +48V/OFF switches  
Select either of the following positions for the  
microphones to be connected.  
when the AUDIO SELECT switches are set to MANUAL.  
OFF: For a microphone to use an internal power supply  
+48V: For a microphone to use an external power supply  
j AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel-1  
and channel-2 adjustment method selection)  
switches  
These switches select the audio level adjustment method  
for each of audio channels 1 and 2.  
AUTO: Select this setting for automatic adjustment.  
MANUAL: Select this setting for manual adjustment.  
n AUDIO OUT (audio output) connector (XLR type,  
5-pin, male)  
This connector outputs the audio signals recorded on audio  
channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4.  
The MONITOR CH-1/2 / CH-3/4 switches allow you to  
select the audio signal to be monitored.  
k AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 / CH-3/CH-4 (audio input  
o AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (audio channel-1 and  
channel-2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin,  
female)  
selection) switches  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
FRONT: The input signal source is the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
These are audio input connectors for channels 1 and 2 to  
which you can connect audio equipment or a microphone.  
When the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector is set to ASE/  
EBU, the CH1 connector is used for channel-1 and -2  
inputs, and the CH2 connector, for channel-3 and -4 inputs.  
REAR: The input signal source is the audio equipment  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
WIRELESS: The input signal source is a WRR-855A/  
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (not supplied).  
p DC OUT 12 V (DC power output) connector  
This connector supplies power for a WRR-862 UHF  
Portable Tuner (not supplied). Do not connect any  
equipment other than the UHF portable tuner.  
AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches  
These switches select the audio input signals to be  
recorded on audio channels 3 and 4.  
F (front): The input signal source is the microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector.  
R (rear): The input signal source is the audio equipment  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
W (wireless): The input signal source is a WRR-855A/  
855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (not supplied).  
With a CA-701 Camera Adaptor (not supplied) connected  
to the camcorder, you can record separate sounds on audio  
channels 3 and 4.  
l LINE /AES/EBU / MIC selectors  
These select the audio source of the audio input signals  
input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors.  
LINE: Line input audio equipment  
AES/EBU: AES/EBU format audio signal  
MIC: Microphone input  
Note  
When these switches are in the MIC position, and the  
+48V switch described below is on, if you inadvertently  
connect any audio device other than a microphone to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, the device may be  
damaged.  
2-3 Audio Functions  
27  
               
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
7 Viewfinder  
8 Diopter adjustment ring  
Eyecup  
1 Tally indicator  
2 BRIGHT control  
3 CONTRAST control  
4 PEAKING control  
5 ZEBRA switch  
6 TALLY switch  
0 Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
qa Camera operator tally indicator  
9 Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever  
qs Viewfinder stopper  
qd LOCK knob  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (1)  
1)  
a Tally indicator  
ON: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays.  
OFF: No zebra pattern is displayed.  
Setting the TALLY switch to HIGH or LOW enables this  
indicator. The indicator lights during recording on the  
VDR (video disc recorder). Like the REC indicator in the  
viewfinder, it flashes to indicate a problem. You can set the  
indicator brightness with the TALLY switch.  
MOMENT: The zebra pattern is displayed and stays for 5  
to 6 seconds.  
The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas  
where the video level is approximately 70%.You can use  
the setup menu to change the setting so that areas where  
the video level is 100% and above are also displayed at the  
same time.  
b BRIGHT (brightness) control  
This control adjusts the picture brightness on the  
viewfinder screen. It has no effect on the camera output  
signal.  
For information about how to change the zebra pattern  
setting in the setup menu, see 6-2-5 “Setting the  
c CONTRAST control  
This control adjusts the picture contrast on the viewfinder  
screen. It has no effect on the camera output signal.  
1) Zebra pattern  
The zebra pattern aids in manual iris adjustment by indicating areas of the  
picture where the video level is approximately 70% and 100% and above.  
d PEAKING control  
This control adjusts the sharpness of the picture on the  
viewfinder screen to make focusing easier. It has no effect  
on the camera output signal.  
f TALLY switch  
This switch controls the tally indicator, setting its  
brightness (HIGH or LOW) or turning it off.  
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is high.  
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.  
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is low.  
e ZEBRA switch  
This switch controls the zebra pattern on the viewfinder  
screen.  
28  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
               
g Viewfinder  
j Viewfinder left-right positioning ring  
Loosen this ring to move the viewfinder sideways.  
The viewfinder lets you view the image in black and white  
while shooting, recording or playing back. It also displays  
various warnings and messages related to the settings or  
operating conditions of the camcorder, a zebra pattern,  
k Camera operator tally indicator  
This indicator lights while the camcorder is recording.  
Slide the window open when you shoot with your eye  
away from the viewfinder. This indicator flashes when the  
battery level is running low or the disc is almost full.  
1)  
2)  
safety zone marker , and center marker  
.
1) Safety zone marker  
The safety zone marker is a rectangle indicating the effective picture area.  
2) Center marker  
l Viewfinder stopper  
The center marker indicates the center of the picture with a crosshair.  
Pull up this stopper to detach the viewfinder from the  
camera.  
m LOCK knob  
h Diopter adjustment ring  
Use this ring to adjust the viewfinder image for your  
vision.  
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear  
direction, loosen this knob and the viewfinder front-rear  
positioning lever. After adjustment, retighten this knob  
and the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever.  
i Viewfinder front-rear positioning lever  
To adjust the viewfinder position in the front-rear  
direction, loosen this lever and the LOCK knob. After  
adjustment, retighten this lever and the LOCK knob.  
ws ASSIGN 3/4 switches  
wa TURBO GAIN button  
qf FILTER selector  
qg ASSIGN. 1/2 switches  
qh SHUTTER selector  
w; WHITE BAL switch  
ql OUTPUT/DCC selector  
qk GAIN selector  
qj AUTO W/B BAL switch  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (2)  
n FILTER selector  
For the PDW-510/510P  
Use this selector to select the most appropriate filter to  
match the light source illuminating the subject.  
When this selector is used with the display mode set to 3,  
the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about  
3 seconds. (e.g.: FILTER: 3)  
The PDW-510 /510P has one switchable filter, and the  
PDW-530 /530P has two switchable filters.  
The relationships between the selector settings and filter  
selections as well as examples of filters for different  
shooting conditions are as follows.  
FILTER selector setting and filter selection  
FILTER selector setting  
Filter selection  
1
2
3200 K  
1
5600 K + / ND  
8
3
4
5600 K  
1
5600 K + / ND  
64  
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters  
Shooting condition  
Sunrise and sunset; inside studio  
Clear skies  
Filter  
1 (3200 K)  
1
2 (5600 K + / ND)  
8
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
29  
         
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters  
When this selector is operated, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area for about 3 seconds.  
Shooting condition  
Filter  
Cloudy or raining  
3 (5600 K)  
1
Very bright conditions such as snow, at  
high altitudes, or at the seashore  
For details about the shutter speed and mode settings, see  
4 (5600 K + / ND)  
64  
For the PDW-530/530P  
q AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance  
adjustment) switch  
This switch activates the white balance and black balance  
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC filter  
selection  
automatic adjustment functions.  
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting CC filter selection  
WHITE: Automatic adjustment of the white balance. If  
the WHITE BAL switch is set to A or B, the white  
balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory.  
On the PDW-530/530P models with two switchable  
filters, the memory stores a separate white balance  
setting for each CC filter setting.  
1)  
A
Cross filter  
B
C
D
3200 K  
4300 K  
6300 K  
BLACK: Automatic adjustment of the black set and black  
balance.  
1) A type of special effect filter. Generates a cross of light on a highlighted  
portion.  
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter  
selection  
r GAIN selector  
This selector switches the gain of the video amplifier to  
match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gains  
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected  
from the setup menu. The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M  
= 9 dB, and H = 18 dB.  
When this selector is adjusted, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting ND filter selection  
1
2
Clear  
1
/4 ND  
1
3
4
/16 ND  
1
/64 ND  
Examples of shooting conditions and appropriate filters  
For details about setting the gain values, see 6-3-1  
Shooting condition  
CC filter  
ND filter  
Sunrise and sunset; inside B (3200 K)  
studio  
1 (clear)  
s OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast  
control) selector  
This selector switches the video signal that is output to the  
VDR, viewfinder, and video monitor, between the  
following two.  
1
Clear skies  
C (4300 K) or  
D (6300 K)  
2 ( /4 ND) or 3  
1/  
( 16 ND)  
Cloudy or raining  
D (6300 K)  
1 (clear) or 2  
( /4 ND)  
1
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.  
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When  
1
Very bright conditions such C (4300 K) or  
as snow, at high altitudes, D (6300 K)  
or at the seashore  
3 ( /16 ND) or  
1
4 ( /64 ND)  
1)  
this is selected, you can switch DCC on and off with  
this selector.  
o ASSIGN. 1/2 switches  
You can assign the desired functions to each of the  
ASSIGN 1 switch (push button) and ASSIGN 2 switch  
(sliding) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
1) DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control)  
Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the  
subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC  
function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail  
and is particularly effective in the following cases.  
•Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day  
•Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window  
•Any high contrast scenes  
p SHUTTER selector  
Set this selector to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push it  
down to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or mode  
setting within the range previously set with the setup  
menu.  
30  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
         
switch and the FILTER selector.  
BARS, DCC OFF  
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when  
A color bar signal is output and the  
DCC circuit does not operate. For  
example, use the setting for the  
following purposes.  
• Adjusting the video monitor  
• Recording the color bar signal  
1)  
ATW is in use.  
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and on the  
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu,  
“WHITE B CH” is set to “ATW” , ATW is activated.  
1)  
1) ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)  
The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for  
the varying lighting conditions.  
CAM, DCC OFF  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit does not  
operate.  
You can assign the ATW ON/OFF function to the  
ASSIGN 1 switch (push button) on the FUNCTION 1 page  
of the USER menu.  
CAM, DCC ON  
The video signal from the camera is  
output, and the DCC circuit operates.  
OUTPUT/DCC selector  
t WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch  
This switch controls the white balance setting.  
PRST (preset): Adjusts the color temperature  
corresponding to the position of the FILTER selector.  
Use the PRST setting when you have no time to adjust  
the white balance.  
A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch is pushed to  
WHT, the white balance is automatically adjusted  
according to the current position of the FILTER  
selector, and the adjusted value is stored in either  
memory A or memory B. (There are two memories for  
each CC filter, allowing a total of eight adjustments to  
be stored.) When this switch is set to A or B, the  
camcorder automatically adjusts itself to the stored  
value corresponding to the current settings of this  
u TURBO GAIN button  
When shooting under extremely poor lighting conditions,  
press the button once to boost the video gain to the value  
preset on the GAIN SW page of the USER menu (up to  
48 dB). To stop boosting the gain, press the button once  
more.  
v ASSIGN 3/4 switches  
You can assign the desired functions to each of the  
ASSIGN 3 switch and ASSIGN 4 switch on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the USER menu.  
wf REMOTE connector  
wg GENLOCK IN connector  
wd VIDEO OUT connector  
wh TEST OUT connector  
wj  
DV IN/OUT S400 connector  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (3)  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
31  
     
w VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)  
For details on how to select the test output signal, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
This connector outputs a composite video signal for a  
video monitor. With a video monitor connected to this  
connector, you can monitor the picture being shot by the  
camera or the picture played back by the VDR. To choose  
between the composite video signal output and SDI signal  
output, use the menu. When synchronizing the time code  
of an external VDR with that of the camcorder, connect  
this connector to the GENLOCK IN connector of the  
external VDR.  
wj  
(i.LINK) DV IN/OUT S400 connector (6-pin,  
IEEE1394 compliant)  
Connect to a device supporting the AV/C protocol or SBP  
2 protocol, using a DV cable.  
By installing the CBK-SD01 extension board (not  
supplied), you can output an SDI signal (supporting  
embedded audio and the EDH function) from this  
connector.  
For details on how to select the output signal, see 6-3-2  
x REMOTE connector (8-pin)  
Connect the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit (not  
supplied), which makes it possible to remote-control the  
VDR and camera.  
y GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)  
• This connector inputs a reference signal when the  
camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be  
synchronized with external equipment. Use the  
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase  
(phase of horizontal sync signal) and the sub-carrier  
phase.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
• This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can  
display the image of the return video signal in the  
viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down  
with “RETURN VIDEO” set to “ON” on the  
GENLOCK page of the OPERATION menu.  
• This connector also inputs an external analog composite  
video signal.  
When the CBK-SC01 extension board (not supplied) is  
installed, you can record the external analog composite  
video signal input to this connector.  
z TEST OUT connector (BNC type)  
This connector outputs the video signal for a video  
monitor. The output signal can be selected to be composite  
or RGB. The factory setting is composite, and the setting  
returns to composite whenever the power is switched on.  
Depending on the internal board and menu settings, the  
menu, the time code and the shot data can be superimposed  
on the image on the monitor. Like the VIDEO OUT  
connector, this connector can also be used to synchronize  
the time code of an external VTR with the time code of the  
camcorder.  
32  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
         
wk REC START button  
wl VDR SAVE/STBY connector  
e; EJECT button and indicaor  
ea F REV button and indicator  
es PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator  
ed F FWD button and indicator  
ef NEXT button  
E
S
U
A
/P  
Y
A
L
P
NEXT  
V
E
R
P
eg STOP button  
eh PREV button  
Shooting and recording/playback functions (4)  
wk REC START button  
es PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator  
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop  
recording. The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR  
button on the lens.  
Press this to view a playback image using the viewfinder  
screen or a color video monitor. The indicator lights during  
playback.  
When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the  
ASSIGN 1, 3 or 4 switch (push button), you can use the  
switch as the REC START button.  
During playback, pressing this button pauses the playback,  
showing a still image. At this time, the indicator flashes.  
This camcorder enables a color-image search at  
approximately four-times normal playback speed, making  
it easy to check recorded material. To use the color-image  
search, press the F REV button or F FWD button during  
playback. When the buttons are pressed, the PLAY  
indicator and the F REV or F FWD indicator light.  
wl VDR SAVE/STBY (standby) switch  
This switch controls the VDR power mode during pauses  
in recording.  
SAVE: Power saving mode. When you start recording, an  
internal operating sound is recorded as noise, but in  
this mode, power consumption is less than in standby  
mode, so that the battery life is extended. When the  
switch is set to SAVE, the SAVE indicator in the  
viewfinder lights.  
ed F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator  
Plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The  
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward  
direction.  
STBY: Standby mode. Recording starts as soon as you  
press the REC START button.  
ef NEXT button  
This jumps to the beginning of the next clip, and pauses.  
During the jump, the F FWD indicator flashes.  
Pressing this button together with the F FWD button jumps  
to the last frame of the last clip recorded on the disc.  
e; EJECT button and indicator  
Press this button to eject or load a disc. The indicator  
flashes while the disc is being ejected.  
ea F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator  
Plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The  
indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse  
direction.  
eg STOP button  
Press this button to stop disc playback.  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
33  
               
eh PREV button  
This jumps to the beginning of the current clip, and pauses.  
During the jump, the F REV indicator flashes.Pressing this  
button together with the F REV button jumps to the first  
frame of the first clip recorded on the disc.  
34  
2-4 Shooting and Recording/Playback Functions  
 
2-5 Output Video Operating Section  
1 SEL/SET dial  
2 THUMBNAIL button  
THUMBNAIL  
3 Thumbnail indicator  
SEL/SET  
ESSENCE MARK  
S.SEL  
SUB CLIP  
4 Sub clip indicator  
5 SUB CLIP button  
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
6 SHIFT button  
Output video operating section  
a SEL/SET (select/set) dial  
e SUB CLIP button  
When thumbnails (each representing a clip) are shown on  
the color LCD, you can select a particular thumbnail with  
this dial.  
Turning the dial upward moves the cursor to the left, and  
when it reaches the left edge, to the rightmost position in  
the row above. Turning the dial downward moves the  
cursor to the right, and when it reaches the right edge, to  
the leftmost position in the row below. After selecting the  
desired thumbnail with the cursor, press the dial in to  
confirm.  
Press this to play back following a clip list.  
You can play back a particular clip or sequential clips, or  
carry out a search following the selected clip list.  
When no clip list is selected, pressing this button has no  
effect, and the operation is invalid.  
To carry out saving, recalling, deletion, or similar  
operations with a clip list, hold down the SHIFT button  
and press this button.  
f SHIFT button  
To carry out a scene selection setting, hold down the  
SHIFT button, and press in this dial.  
Use this in combination with other buttons.  
b THUMBNAIL button  
To carry out a search using thumbnails, or to create a clip  
list, press this button.  
Pressing it switches from the whole-screen display to a  
thumbnail display. Press once more to return to the whole-  
screen display.  
To search thumbnails by essence marks, hold down the  
SHIFT button and press this button.  
c Thumbnail indicator  
This lights when thumbnails are shown.  
d Sub clip indicator  
This lights when playing back following a clip list.  
2-5 Output Video Operating Section  
35  
               
2-6 Menu Operating Section  
2 STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch  
3 MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU  
4 CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
5 “Memory Stick” compartment  
Cover  
1 MENU knob  
a MENU knob  
Use this knob to change the page selection or a setting  
c MENU ON/OFF switch  
To use this switch, open the cover.  
within the menu.  
This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder  
screen or the test signal screen. Closing the cover  
automatically sets this switch to OFF.  
ON: Displays the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test  
signal screen, at the last accessed page. (When the  
menu is used for the first time, the first page is  
displayed.)  
Press: If you press this knob when the arrow (b) is placed  
at the page title on the menu, the arrow changes to the  
question mark (?) and you can change the page.  
When the arrow mark is placed at the position other  
than the page title, you can change the current setting  
by pressing this knob.  
Turn: Turn this knob to change the page or change the  
settings of the items.  
OFF: Removes the menu from the viewfinder screen or  
the test signal screen.  
b STATUS ON/SEL / OFF (menu display on/page  
selection/display off) switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to  
d CANCEL/PRST (preset) / ESCAPE switch  
To enable this switch, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to  
ON.  
OFF.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF.  
CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position  
displays the message to confirm whether the previous  
settings are cancelled or settings are reset to their  
initial values, depending on the menu operating  
condition.  
ON/SEL: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a  
window to confirm the menu settings and status of the  
camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen. The  
window consists of three pages, which are switched  
each time the switch is pushed upward. Each page is  
displayed for about 10 seconds.  
Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels  
the previous settings or resets the settings to their  
initial values.  
OFF: To clear the page immediately after display, push  
this switch down to the OFF position.  
ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has  
a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the  
switch is pushed to this position, the page returns to  
one stage higher in the hierarchy.  
You can select the pages to be displayed on the menu.  
36  
2-6 Menu Operating Section  
           
e “Memory Stick” compartment  
“Memory Stick”  
Access indicator  
Label  
“Memory Stick”  
How to insert a “Memory Stick”  
Open the lid of the menu operating section, and insert a  
“Memory Stick” (not supplied), with the notch facing  
downward, in the direction shown by the arrow, so that it  
clicks into place.  
To remove a “Memory Stick”, first press it in to release the  
lock, then withdraw.  
The “Memory Stick” access indicator lights when the  
“Memory Stick” is being accessed (for reading or writing).  
For details about types of “Memory Stick”, see “About a  
Notes  
• Do not insert/remove a “Memory Stick” while the  
“Memory Stick” access indicator is lit or flashing. Doing  
so may cause a loss of data.  
• This device uses only a standard “Memory Stick”. It is  
not possible to use the type of “MagicGate Memory  
Stick” equipped with MagicGate copyright protection  
technology, or a “Memory Stick PRO”.  
2-6 Menu Operating Section  
37  
   
2-7 Time Code System  
1 TC IN connector  
2 TC OUT connector  
3 GENLOCK IN connector  
Time code functions (1)  
a TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code with an external time code,  
input the reference time code to this connector.  
b TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of an external VTR with that  
of the camcorder, connect this connector to the time code  
input connector for time code locking of the external VTR.  
c GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)  
• This connector inputs a reference signal when the  
camera is to be genlocked or when the time code is to be  
synchronized with external equipment. Use the  
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase  
(phase of horizontal sync signal) and the sub-carrier  
phase.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
• This connector also inputs a return video signal. You can  
display the image of the return video signal in the  
viewfinder screen while holding the RET button down  
with “RETURN VIDEO” set to “ON” on the  
GENLOCK page of the OPERATION menu.  
• This connector also inputs an external analog composite  
video signal.  
When the CBK-SC01 extension board (not supplied) is  
installed, you can record the external analog composite  
video signal input to this connector.  
38  
2-7 Time Code System  
         
4 DISPLAY switch  
5 RESET button  
6 HOLD button  
THUMBNAIL  
SEL/SET  
S.SEL  
ESSENCE MARK  
SUB CLIP  
7 SEL/SET dial  
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
8 PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch  
9 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch  
Time code functions (2)  
d DISPLAY switch  
g SEL/SET (select/set) dial  
This cycles the data displayed in the counter display  
through the sequence TC, U-BIT, and COUNTER.  
TC: The playback time code read by the internal time code  
reader, or the time code generated by the internal time  
code generator.  
To set a timecode, user bit value, or real time, press this  
dial so that the digit you want to change flashes.  
Turning the dial upward increases the value of the flashing  
digit, and turning it downward decreases the value.  
U-BIT: The user bits inserted in the playback time code,  
or user bits generated by the internal time code  
generator  
h PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch  
This switch selects whether to set a new time code or to  
follow the already recorded time code.  
COUNTER: The elapsed recording/playback time (hours,  
minutes, seconds, frames).  
PRESET: Records a time code with a preset initial value.  
REGEN: Records a time code to be continuous with the  
existing time code recorded on the disc. Regardless of  
the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the  
camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.  
e RESET button  
CLOCK: Records a time code synchronized to the  
internal clock. Regardless of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch setting, the camcorder always operates in F-  
RUN mode.  
Pressing this button resets the time data displayed on the  
counter display section to “00:00:00:00” or the user bit  
data to “00000000.”  
f HOLD (display hold) button  
i F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)  
switch  
This switch selects the operating mode for the internal time  
Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data  
displayed in the counter display section. (The time code  
generator continues running.) Pressing this button again  
releases the hold. You can use this button, for example, to  
determine the exact time of a particular shot.  
When the HOLD button is activated, the time data is  
displayed in the following format:  
code generator.  
F-RUN: The time code value keeps advancing, regardless  
of the operating state of the VDR. Use this setting  
when aligning the time code with real time or for  
synchronizing the time code with an external time  
code.  
SET: Set the switch to this position to set the time code or  
user bits.  
For details of the counter display, see 2-9 “Warnings and  
2-7 Time Code System  
39  
         
R-RUN: The time code value advances only during  
recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive time  
code on the disc.  
40  
2-7 Time Code System  
2-8 Warnings and Indications  
Besides the viewfinder, speaker and earphones, the  
indicators and displays described in this section also  
provide you with information such as the operating state of  
the camcorder and warnings.  
1 Tally indicator  
2 DISPLAY switch  
3 TALLY switch  
4 Back tally indicator  
5 Back tally switch  
8 Color LCD  
9 WARNING indicator  
q; ACCESS indicator  
6 Monochrome LCD  
qa Rear tally indicator  
7 DISP SEL switch  
qs LCD switch  
Warning and indication functions  
a Tally indicator  
Note  
Setting the TALLY switch on the viewfinder to HIGH or  
LOW enables this indicator. It lights when the VDR starts  
recording. Like the REC indicator in the viewfinder, it also  
flashes to provide warnings. The brightness of this  
indicator when it is lit can be switched with the TALLY  
switch.  
Setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON displays the  
menu on the viewfinder screen even if the DISPLAY  
switch is set to OFF.  
c TALLY switch  
This switch controls the tally indicator as follows.  
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is high.  
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.  
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is low.  
b DISPLAY switch  
This switches the indications on the viewfinder screen on  
or off.  
ON: The indications appear on the viewfinder screen.  
OFF: The indications do not appear on the viewfinder  
screen.  
d Back tally indicator  
When the back tally ON/OFF switch is set to ON, this  
indicator has the same function as the tally indicator.  
2-8 Warnings and Indications  
41  
           
e Back tally ON/OFF switch  
This switch enables or disables the back tally and rear tally  
indicators.  
ON: The back tally and rear tally indicators are enabled.  
OFF: The back tally and rear tally indicators are disabled.  
f Monochrome LCD  
This shows the remaining battery capacity, remaining disc  
capacity, time data, and so on.  
g DISP SEL (display selection) switch  
This switches the display in the color LCD.  
CHAR: Display video with superimposed text. With the  
MENU ON/OFF switch set to OFF, also display  
camcorder status indications similar to those displayed  
MONI: Display video without superimposed text.  
STATUS: Display counter, warnings, and audio levels.  
h Color LCD  
This displays VDR-related warnings, remaining battery  
capacity, remaining disc capacity, audio levels, time data,  
and so on.  
i WARNING indicator  
This indicator lights up or flashes when there is a fault in  
the VDR.  
j ACCESS indicator  
This lights when data is written to or read from the disc.  
k Rear tally indicator  
When the back tally ON/OFF switch is set to ON, this  
indicator has the same function as the tally indicator.  
l LCD switch  
This controls the color LCD.  
OFF: The color LCD is turned off.  
L: The color LCD is adjusted for viewing indoors.  
H: The color LCD is adjusted for viewing outdoors.  
42  
2-8 Warnings and Indications  
               
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs  
2-9-1 Monochrome LCD  
Disc status and battery status  
Time code display  
Disc status indicator  
Lights when the time code or real time is  
displayed.  
Full capacity is available.  
Time counter display: Shows the time  
code, user bits, and real time.  
Close to full state: “DISC” flashes.  
Full (disc must be replaced):  
“DISC” and “E” flash.  
1)  
Lights when the HOLD button is pressed.  
Battery status indicator  
1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value,  
the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When  
the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time  
code is displayed in the normal format  
Fully charged  
Time code display on the monochrome LCD  
Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.  
Dead battery (battery must be  
charged): “BATT” and “E” flash.  
Display of remaining disc capacity and remaining battery capacity on  
the monochrome LCD  
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs  
43  
             
2-9-2 Color LCD  
Disc status, battery status and audio level  
VDR operation status and status  
indicators  
Disc status indicator  
Full capacity is available.  
Close to full state: “DISC” flashes.  
Full (disc must be replaced): “DISC” and “E” flash.  
Formats of video and audio  
signals to be redorded.  
Warning display area  
This shows a message if a recording fault or  
condensation is detected.  
134.  
Audio level meters  
VDR operation and status indicators on the color LCD  
Battery status indicator  
Fully charged  
Nearly dead: “BATT” flashes.  
Dead battery (battery must be charged): “BATT”  
and “E” flash.  
Display of remaining disc capacity, remaining battery capacity, and  
audio levels on the color LCD  
44  
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs  
           
Time code display  
Lights when VITC is selected for the time code.  
Lights in playback mode.  
Lights in non-drop frame  
mode. (PDW-510/530 only)  
Lights when the camcorder is  
synchronized with an external time code.  
Lights when the time code  
generator is on hold.  
1)  
Lights when the HOLD button is pressed  
Lights when the time code or real time is displayed.  
Time counter display: Shows the time code, user  
bit data, and real time.  
1) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the time code value,  
the time code is displayed in the format shown below. When the  
HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the time code  
is displayed in the normal format.  
Time code display on the color LCD  
2-9 Warnings and Indications on the LCDs  
45  
   
2-10 Indicators in the Viewfinder  
e Spare indicator  
This is a spare indicator. A menu operation makes it  
1 TALLY indicator  
possible to use this as a REC indicator.  
2 REC (recording) indicator  
3 BATT (battery) indicator  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
f SAVE indicator  
This indicator lights when the VDR SAVE/STBY switch  
Viewfinder screen  
is set to SAVE, putting the VDR in power save mode.  
4
(warning) indicator  
5 Spare indicator  
6 SAVE indicator  
Indicators on the viewfinder  
a TALLY indicator  
This indicator lights when the camcorder is in the Picture  
Cash mode. Also, this indicator lights when a green tally  
signal is received from the camera control unit.  
b REC (recording) indicator  
This indicator lights red when recording starts and remains  
lit during recording. It also lights when a red tally signal is  
received from the camera control unit and flashes to give a  
warning.  
c BATT (battery) indicator  
This indicator starts flashing when the battery connected to  
the camcorder is nearly exhausted, and stays lit when the  
battery is completely exhausted.  
The battery power level at which the indicator starts  
flashing can be set on the BATTERY page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
d
(warning) indicator  
This indicator lights when any of the following conditions  
occurs with the corresponding item set to ON on the “!”  
LED page of the USER menu.  
• The gain is set to other than 0 dB.  
• The SHUTTER selector is set to ON.  
• The WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST.  
• ATW is enabled.  
• The lens extender is used.  
• The FILTER selector is set to other than ND:1/CC:B.  
• The reference value of the auto iris adjustment is not the  
standard value.  
46  
2-10 Indicators in the Viewfinder  
   
Recording and Playback  
3
Chapter  
3-1 Handling Discs  
• Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain  
ingress.  
• Store cartridges in their cases.  
3-1-1 Discs Used for Recording and  
Playback  
Care of the discs  
• Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using  
a soft dry cloth.  
• If condensation forms, allow ample time to dry before  
use.  
This camcorder uses the following disc for recording and  
playback:  
PFD23 Professional Disc (capacity 23.3 GB)  
Note  
It is not possible to use the following discs for recording or  
playback:  
• Blu-ray Disc  
3-1-3 Write-Protecting Discs  
To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental  
erasure, move the write-protect tab on the lower surface of  
the disc in the direction of the arrow, as shown in the  
following figure.  
• Professional Disc for Data  
3-1-2 Notes on Handling  
Handling  
The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge, and is  
designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or  
fingerprints. However, if the cartridge is subjected to a  
severe shock, for example by dropping it, this can result in  
damage or scratching of the disc. If the disc is scratched, it  
may be impossible to record video/audio, or to play back  
the content recorded on the disc. The discs should be  
handled and stored carefully.  
Lower surface of the disc  
Write-protect tab  
• Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the  
cartridge.  
E
V
A
S
• Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage.  
• Do not disassemble the cartridge.  
• The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for  
indexing discs. Apply the label in the correct position.  
Slide in the direction of the arrow  
Write-protect tab settings  
SAVE  
SAVE  
Storage  
• Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct  
sunlight, or in other places where the temperature or  
humidity is high.  
Recording enabled  
Recording disabled  
3-1 Handling Discs  
47  
                       
Note  
3-1-4 Loading and Unloading a Disc  
To insert the disc correctly, make sure that the  
camcorder is in the upright position (the grip upside,  
the bottom downside).  
Loading a disc  
Proceed as follows.  
Unloading a disc  
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
With the power supply on, press the EJECT button to open  
the disc compartment lid and eject the disc. Then remove  
the disc. If you are not going to insert another disc, close  
the disc compartment lid.  
Unloading a disc when the power supply is  
off  
If the battery is exhausted, it is not possible to remove the  
disc by pressing the EJECT button. In such cases, use the  
following emergency procedure to remove the disc  
manually.  
POWER switch  
HUMID indicator  
1
2
Turn off the POWER switch.  
Note  
Carry out the operation shown in the following figure.  
If there is condensation inside the VDR section, the  
HUMID indicator lights. If this happens, wait until the  
indicator goes off before going on to step 2.  
1 Open this rubber cover.  
2 Using a screwdriver or  
similar implement, slide  
the black metal plate  
visible inside, in the  
direction of the rear of the  
camcorder.  
2
Press the EJECT button.  
This opens the lid of the disc compartment.  
EJECT button  
The disc compartment lid  
opens. A red Phillips  
screw is visible inside the  
rubber cap.  
3 Insert a screwdriver into  
the Phillips screw, and  
turn counterclockwise  
(the direction shown on  
the rubber cap).  
This ejects the disc.  
4 Close the rubber cover  
firmly.  
Lid of the disc  
compartment  
3
Insert the disc in the V direction, and close the disc  
compartment lid manually.  
Insert the disc.  
V indication on  
the outside  
Unloading a disc manually when the power supply is off  
Push and  
close the lid.  
48  
3-1 Handling Discs  
   
You need not return the screw to its original position after  
taking out the disc. Turning on the power makes the disc  
compartment mechanism operable again.  
3-2 Recording  
3-1-5 Formatting a Disc  
3-2-1 Basic Procedures  
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting  
and recording.  
Before a shooting session, ensure that the camcorder is  
functioning properly.  
Using a new disc  
An unused disc requires no formatting operation. The disc  
is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when  
loaded into this unit.  
Using a disc on which material is recorded  
You can use a disc containing recorded material as is, but  
if necessary you can delete individual clips or the whole  
content.  
Recording format settings (PDW-530/530P  
only)  
With the PDW-530/530P you can select the recording  
formats for each of video and audio.  
Note that it is not possible to use different recording  
formats on a single disc.  
Set the recording format before beginning recording.  
Note  
It is not possible to mix different recording formats on a  
single disc. Either select the same format as the existing  
recording, or use a different disc.  
For details of the setting operations, see 5-1-1 “Setting the  
For details of the recording format settings, see 5-1-1  
Basic procedure for shooting: from turning  
on the camcorder to loading a disc  
Proceed as follows.  
4
5
1
3
2
Basic procedure for shooting: from power supply to disc loading  
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
1
Turn on the POWER switch.  
2
3
Set the DISP SEL switch to STATUS, and check on  
the color LCD that the following conditions are met.  
• The HUMID indicator is not showing.  
If it is, wait until it disappears.  
3-2 Recording  
49  
               
• The battery indicator shows at least five segments.  
If it does not, replace the battery pack with a fully  
charged one.  
For details of black balance adjustment, see 5-2-1  
2
Select the CC filter and ND filter to match the lighting  
conditions, and adjust the white balance.  
4
5
Check that there are no obstructions such as cables  
near the disc compartment lid. Then press the EJECT  
button to open the disc compartment lid.  
When the black balance and white balance settings  
are already in memory:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to A or B.  
After checking that the disc is not write-protected (see  
page 47), load it and close the disc compartment lid.  
When the white balance setting is not in memory  
and you do not have enough time to adjust the  
white balance:  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
This automatically adjusts the white balance as  
follows, depending on the setting of the FILTER knob.  
• For the PDW-530/530P:  
Basic procedure for shooting: from  
adjusting the black balance and white  
balance to stopping recording  
After turning on the power and loading a disc, set the  
switches and selectors as shown below and begin  
operation.  
B: 3200 K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300 K  
• For the PDW-510/510P:  
1: 3200 K, 3: 5600 K  
DISPLAY: ON  
AUDIO SELECT  
CH-1/CH-2: AUTO  
Iris: Automatic  
3
4
Aim the camera at the subject and adjust the focus and  
zoom.  
Zoom: Automatic  
If necessary, set the electronic shutter for an  
appropriate mode and speed.  
OUTPUT/DCC: CAM, DCC ON  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN: F-RUN or R-RUN  
(set as needed)  
5
To start recording, press the REC START button or  
the VTR button on the lens.  
Switch and selector settings before shooting  
Shooting  
Proceed as follows.  
If the recording start/stop function is assigned to the  
ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, this switch functions as REC  
START button.  
1,2  
3,5  
During recording, the REC indicator lights in the  
viewfinder. Perform zooming and focus control, if  
necessary.  
2
4
5,6  
Note  
During recording (while the ACCESS indicator is lit)  
do not remove the battery pack. If you do, the last four  
seconds of recording may be lost.  
Basic procedure for shooting: from adjusting the black balance and  
white balance to stopping recording  
6
To stop recording, press the REC START button or the  
VTR button on the lens again.  
1
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK to adjust the  
black balance.  
The REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
The material recorded from step 5 to step 6 is saved as  
a single clip.  
50  
3-2 Recording  
     
To play back the recorded clip  
Press the PREV button, then press the PLAY button to  
MAINTENANCE menu appears. If the menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
play from the beginning of the clip.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “DISC”, and press the  
MENU knob to display the DISC page.  
7
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required for shooting.  
Each time you repeat steps 5 and 6 , successive clips  
are recorded on the disc.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the DISC page appears, then press the MENU  
knob to select the page.  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
M19 DISC  
TOP  
DELETE LAST CLIP:  
DELETE ALL CLIPS:  
EXEC  
EXEC  
REC  
START  
REC REC  
STOP START  
REC REC  
STOP START  
REC  
STOP  
QUICK FORMAT  
:
EXEC  
Note  
It is not possible to record a clip shorter than 2 seconds. If  
you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting, this results  
in a 2-second clip.  
If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of the  
original start, this creates a single continuous clip from the  
original start time.  
4
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark  
to “DELETE LAST CLIP”, and press the MENU knob  
again.  
The message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
Playback control buttons  
During recording, the EJECT button and the playback  
control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV,  
PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) have no effect.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “YES”,  
and press the MENU knob again.  
The last recorded clip is deleted.  
3-2-2 Deleting Clips  
By repeating steps 4 and 5, you can delete a number of  
clips in sequence from the last recorded clip.  
With this camcorder you can delete clips one at a time, in  
sequence from the last recorded clip, or you can delete all  
clips in a single operation.  
Clip 1  
Clip 2  
Clip 3  
To delete the last recorded clip  
Proceed as follows.  
Clips can be deleted in the sequence 3 t 2 t 1.  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
To delete all clips within the disc  
Proceed as follows.  
The TOP menu appears.  
1
On the DISC page (see the previous item), move the b  
mark to “DELETE ALL CLIPS”, and press the MENU  
knob.  
The message “DELTE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
2
To execute deleting, turn the MENU knob to move the  
b mark to “YES”, and press the MENU knob.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“MAINTENANCE”, and press the MENU knob.  
This deletes all clips within the disc.  
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has  
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
3-2 Recording  
51  
       
PDW-510/510P/530/530P  
VIDEO OUT connector  
3-3 Checking the  
Recording –  
Playback  
Color video monitor  
VIDEO IN  
1)  
connector  
2)  
SDI IN connector  
By pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button, you can review any  
length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and  
white or in color on the color LCD. There are two other  
ways to review the recording.  
1) When VBS is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT  
connector  
2) When SDI is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT  
connector (only when the CBK-SD01 (not supplied) is installed)  
• Recording review: You can view the last 2 seconds of  
the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and  
white or in color on the color LCD.  
Color playback  
• Color playback: You can see the recording in color on a  
color video monitor without the need for any external  
adaptor.  
Note  
You can select either VBS or SDI as the output signal of  
the VIDEO OUT connector when the CBK-SD01 (not  
supplied) is installed.  
You may also view the picture during a fast forward or  
reverse search.  
the switches and controls used to select the audio output  
signal and to adjust the audio level.  
3-3-1 Checking the Last Two  
Seconds of the Recording —  
Recording Review  
If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is  
paused, the last two seconds of the recording is played  
back on the viewfinder screen and the color LCD. Use this  
function to check whether recording went smoothly. If you  
hold down the RET button, the last recorded clip is played  
back from its beginning. After playback, the camcorder is  
ready to start recording again.  
By assigning the the same function as that of the LENS  
RET button on the lens to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch, you  
can use the switch in the same way as the lens RET button.  
3-3-2 Checking the Recording on  
the Color Video Monitor —  
Playback in Color  
Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT  
connector of the camcorder. By pressing the PLAY/  
PAUSE button, you can view the recorded picture.  
When the CBK-SD01 extension board (not supplied) is  
installed, you can connect a color video monitor provided  
with an SDI input connector.  
52  
3-3 Checking the Recording – Playback  
             
The TOP menu appears.  
3-4 Recording Video  
Signals from  
External Equipment  
With this camcorder, you can select in the OPERATION  
menu whether to record the video captured by the camera,  
or whether to record a signal from an external video  
device.  
If this switching function is assigned to the ASSIGN 2  
switch, regardless of the setting in the OPERATION  
menu, you can make the selection with the ASSIGN 2  
switch. While recording video from an external device, the  
indication “EXT” appears on the viewfinder screen.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“OPERATION”.  
Press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION  
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the  
last accessed page appears.  
Notes  
• You can switch the signals to be recorded at any time  
while recording on the disc. However, the signals  
recorded at the point where the signal is switched may be  
distorted.  
• Even when the REC VIDEO SOURCE item is set to  
“EXT”, if the external video signal is not input to the  
i.LINK DV IN/OUT connector or the GENLOCK IN  
connector, the camcorder does not switch to EXT mode,  
and the pictures being shot by the camcorder are  
recorded on the disc.  
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “SOURCE SEL”, and  
press the MENU knob to display the SOURCE SEL  
page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the SOURCE SEL page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
21 SOURCE SEL  
TOP  
REC VIDEO SOURCE:  
EXT REC CONTROL :  
I.LINK SBP2 MODE: DSABL  
CAM  
OFF  
3-4-1 Recording a DV Stream From  
External Equipment  
Note  
Recording a DV stream is possible only when the video  
recording format is DVCAM.  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC  
VIDEO SOURCE”, then press the MENU knob.  
If the currently set video recording format is other than  
DVCAM, change it to DVCAM referring to 5-1-1 “Setting  
21 SOURCE SEL  
TOP  
REC VIDEO SOURCE:  
EXT REC CONTROL :  
I.LINK SBP2 MODE: DSABL  
CAM  
OFF  
Proceed as follows.  
Item  
Description  
CAM  
Records the pictures being shot by the  
camcorder.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
EXT  
Records video signals from the  
external equipment connected to the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding  
down the MENU knob.  
3-4 Recording Video Signals from External Equipment  
53  
     
The b mark on the left of “REC VIDEO SOURCE”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
2
3
Move the b mark to “EXT VIDEO SOURCE”, and  
press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to display “CMPST”.  
6
7
Turn the MENU knob to display “EXT”.  
This ends the setting.  
When you input analog composite signals to the  
GENLOCK IN connector of the camcorder, these  
signals are displayed on the viewfinder screen and the  
color LCD, and can be recorded on the disc.  
21 SOURCE SEL  
TOP  
REC VIDEO SOURCE:  
EXT REC CONTROL :  
I.LINK SBP2 MODE: DSABL  
EXT  
OFF  
Note  
Even when the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF”  
on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu,  
the camcorder is automatically synchronized with the  
external reference video signal when the external video  
signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector in EXT  
mode. When the setting is switched to CAM mode, or  
when no signals are input to the GENLOCK IN connector  
even in EXT mode, the camcorder is reset to the original  
setting.  
Press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
Note  
During i.LINK DV stream input, the image on the  
viewfinder screen and the color LCD may occasionally  
show an overlapped frame or skipped frame, but this does  
not affect the recording on the disc.  
During i.LINK DV stream input, the audio within the DV  
stream is recorded as the audio input.  
3-4-2 Recording Analog Composite  
Signals (With the CBK-SC01  
Installed)  
Installing the CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board (not  
supplied) in the camcorder enables you to record analog  
composite signals from external equipment connected to  
the GENLOCK IN connector.  
To make a setting for recording analog composite signals  
from external equipment, proceed as follows.  
1
Display the SOURCE SEL page on the screen.  
21 SOURCE SEL  
TOP  
REC VIDEO SOURCE:  
EXT REC CONTROL :  
CAM  
OFF  
I.LINK SBP2 MODE: DSABL  
EXT VIDEO SOURCE: ILINK  
EXT OUTPUT DELAY: SYNC  
SET UP REMOVE 0.0%  
:
54  
3-4 Recording Video Signals from External Equipment  
     
3-5 Freezing a Picture  
During Playback  
Viewing frozen pictures  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to start playback.  
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button again at the instant  
when you want to freeze the picture.  
A frozen picture appears.  
The time code is displayed in the counter display and  
the PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes (one flash/  
second).  
3
To restart playback, press the PLAY/PAUSE button  
once again.  
When remotely controlling the camcorder from  
an RM-B150/B750 remote control unit (not  
supplied)  
You can perform the same operation from the RM-B150/  
B750.  
3-5 Freezing a Picture During Playback  
55  
   
56  
3-5 Freezing a Picture During Playback  
Thumbnail Search  
4
Chapter  
This indicates that these are  
Sixth clip is selected from  
a total of 143 clips.  
thumbnail images of clips.  
4-1 Thumbnail Search  
Operations  
Currently selected clip  
4-1-1 Cuing Up to a Desired Clip  
To do this you display thumbnail images, then cue up to a  
desired clip.  
2,3  
1
THUMBNAIL  
Thumbnail  
SEL/SET  
indicator  
ESSENCE MARK  
S.SEL  
SUB CLIP  
Recording date and time  
of selected clip  
Duration of selected clip  
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
2
3
Turn the SEL/SET dial to select the desired clip.  
Press the SET/SET dial button.  
This displays the first frame of the selected clip.  
Thumbnail search  
To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc,  
and cue up to a desired clip, proceed as follows.  
1
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning on the  
thumbnail indicator.  
The thumbnails of all clips on the disc appear.  
4-1 Thumbnail Search Operations  
57  
         
Next, you can play the selected clip, or include it in a clip  
list, as required.  
To escape from the thumbnail images to  
full-screen display  
Press the THUMBNAIL button, turning off the thumbnail  
indicator.  
Note  
When operating from the battery, if the VDR SAVE/  
STBY switch is in the SAVE position, there is a delay until  
the thumbnail display appears.  
During this delay, the indication “THUMBNAIL  
PROCESSING” appears on the viewfinder screen and  
color LCD.  
58  
4-1 Thumbnail Search Operations  
Adjustments and  
Settings for Recording  
5
Chapter  
<TOP MENU>  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
5-1 Setting the  
Recording Format  
(PDW-530/530P only)  
Before recording with the PDW-530/530P, it is necessary  
to set the recording format for each of video and audio.  
Video recording format: MPEG IMX 50 Mbps, 40 Mbps,  
30 Mbps, or DVCAM  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“MAINTENANCE”.  
Audio recording format: 16-bit 48 kHz or 24-bit 48 kHz  
<TOP MENU>  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
Note  
It is not possible to combine different recording formats on  
a single disc.  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
5-1-1 Setting the Video Recording  
Format  
4
5
Press the MENU knob.  
You can select the video recording format in a menu, from  
MPEG IMX 50 Mbps, MPEG IMX 40 Mbps, MPEG IMX  
30 Mbps, and DVCAM.  
The factory default selection is “IMX50”.  
To select the desired video recording format, proceed as  
follows.  
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has  
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu appears. If the menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “VDR MODE”, and press  
the MENU knob to display the VDR MODE page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the VDR MODE page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
1
2
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
The TOP menu appears.  
5-1 Setting the Recording Format (PDW-530/530P only)  
59  
             
For the operation, see the descriptions of steps 1 to 5  
M09 VDR MODE  
TOP  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
ON  
OFF  
SEL  
IH  
IMX50  
REC START/STOP  
MODE SELECT  
TIMER SET  
:
:
:
:
2
Press the MENU knob, then turn it to move the b mark  
to “AU DATA LEN (IMX)”, and press the MENU  
knob.  
REC FORMAT  
M06 AUDIO-2  
TOP  
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REC  
FORMAT”, and press the MENU knob again.  
AU DATA LEN (IMX):?16bit  
AU REF LEVEL : -20db  
AU REF OUT 0db  
AU CH12 AGC MODE : MONO  
AU CH34 AGC MODE : MONO  
:
AU AGC SPEC  
AU LIMITER MODE  
AU OUT LIMITER  
:
:
:
-6db  
OFF  
ON  
M09 VDR MODE  
TOP  
I.LINK AUDIO OUT :  
2CH  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
ON  
OFF  
SEL  
IH  
REC START/STOP  
MODE SELECT  
TIMER SET  
:
:
:
REC FORMAT  
:? IMX50  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired format,  
and press the MENU knob.  
Move the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the  
cover of the menu operating section.  
The b mark at the side of “REC FORMAT” changes  
to a z mark, and the z mark by “IMX50” changes to  
a ? mark.  
This ends the menu operation.  
The above procedure completes the setting of the  
recording format.  
7
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired recording  
format.  
M09 VDR MODE  
TOP  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
ON  
OFF  
SEL  
IH  
REC START/STOP  
MODE SELECT  
TIMER SET  
:
:
:
REC FORMAT  
:? IMX40  
8
9
Press the MENU knob.  
This confirms the selection.  
Align the b mark with “TOP” at the top right of the  
menu page, and press the MENU knob.  
This returns to the TOP menu.  
5-1-2 Setting the Audio Recording  
Format  
You can select the audio recording format in a menu, from  
16-bit 48 kHz and 24-bit 48 kHz. The factory default  
selection is “16bit”.  
To select the desired audio recording format, proceed as  
follows.  
1
Display the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
60  
5-1 Setting the Recording Format (PDW-530/530P only)  
   
For details of manual black balance adjustment, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
5-2 Adjusting the Black  
Balance and the  
To adjust the black balance, proceed as follows.  
White Balance  
To ensure excellent image quality when using this  
camcorder, conditions may require that both the black  
balance and the white balance be adjusted.  
OUTPUT/DCC switch  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
Black balance adjustment  
The black balance will require adjustment in the following  
cases.  
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM.  
• When the camcorder is used for the first time  
• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time  
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which  
the surrounding temperature has changed greatly  
• When the GAIN selector values have been changed by  
using the USER menu  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLK and release  
the switch.  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when  
using the camcorder after it has been off.  
During adjustment, the following message is displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
White balance adjustment  
Always readjust the white balance when the lighting  
conditions change.  
Themessageschange  
in the following  
sequence :  
-BLACK SET-  
-BLACK BALANCE-  
t
Viewfinder screen displays  
ABB:EXECUTING  
-BLACK SET-  
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started,  
messages that report on the progress and results are  
displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP  
MODE item is set to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of  
the USER menu.  
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds  
with the message “ABB:OK” and the adjustment value  
is automatically stored in memory.  
Note  
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that  
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various  
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained  
even when the power is turned off.  
Notes  
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is  
automatically closed.  
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection  
circuit is automatically activated so you may see  
flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault.  
5-2-1 Adjusting the Black Balance  
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are  
performed in the following order: clamp level, black set,  
and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can  
be selected from the setup menu.  
If automatic black balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
Note that the automatic black balance adjustment  
includes a function to correct for white flecks caused in  
the CCDs by cosmic rays, in addition to the normal  
black balance operation.  
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
61  
     
Black balance adjustment error messages  
FILTER selector  
Error message Meaning  
ABB : NG  
IRIS NOT  
CLOSED  
The lens iris did not close; adjustment  
was impossible.  
ABB : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of attempts.  
ABB : NG  
R (or G or B) :  
OVERFLOW  
The difference between the reference  
value and the current value is so great  
that it exceeds the range. Adjustment  
was impossible.  
OUTPUT/DCC  
switch: CAM  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
black balance adjustment.  
Keep pushing the AUTO W/B BAL to BLK until “-  
BLACK SET-” appears after “-BLACK BALANCE-”  
appears. If the error message occurs again, an internal  
check is necessary.  
WHITE BAL  
switch: A or B  
1)  
For information about this internal check, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
GAIN selector: Set as low as  
possible.  
Note  
If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS  
connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If  
this happens, the black balance will be incorrect.  
1) White balance setting values are stored in memory B only  
when the WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “MEM” on  
the FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu.  
Black balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the black balance  
is next adjusted.  
If the setting of the GAIN selector or WHITE BAL  
switch is changed, a message reporting the new setting  
position appears for about 3 seconds in the setting  
change and adjustment progress message display area  
of the viewfinder screen.  
If a memory error occurs  
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on  
the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the  
black balance and white balance memory contents have  
been lost.  
Adjust the black balance and white balance again. Contact  
your Sony representative if this message continues to  
appear even after the black balance and white balance have  
been adjusted again.  
2
Set the FILTER selector to suit the lighting conditions  
as follows.  
For the PDW-530/530P:  
FILTER selector (outer knob) setting and CC filter  
selection  
FILTER selector (outer knob) CC filter  
setting  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
A
B
C
D
Cross filter  
3200 K  
5-2-2 Adjusting the White Balance  
4300 K  
6300 K  
To automatically adjust the white balance  
Proceed as follows.  
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter  
selection  
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure  
below.  
FILTER selector (inner knob) ND filter  
setting  
1
2
Clear  
1
/ ND  
4
1
3
/
ND  
16  
62  
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
     
FILTER selector (inner knob) setting and ND filter  
selection  
FILTER selector (inner knob) ND filter  
setting  
1
4
/
ND  
64  
For the PDW-510/510P:  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
FILTER selector setting and filter selection  
FILTER selector setting  
Filter selection  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
1
2
3200 K  
1
5600 K + / ND  
8
During adjustment, the message “WHITE : OP” is  
displayed on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2  
or 3).  
3
4
5600 K  
1
5600 K + / ND  
64  
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a  
message reporting the setting appears for about 3  
seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress  
message display area of the viewfinder screen (in  
display mode 3).  
The white balance adjustment ends in about one  
second with the message shown in the following  
figure, and the adjustment setting is automatically  
stored in the memory (A or B) that was selected in step  
1.  
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting  
conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to  
it. Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a  
wall can be used.  
Approximate color  
temperature of the  
AWB:OK  
. K  
The absolute minimum white area is as follows.  
subject  
Rectangle centered on  
the screen. The lengths  
of the sides are 70% of  
the length and width of  
the screen.  
Note  
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,  
the iris may hunt during the adjustment. To prevent  
this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S)  
on the lens.  
1)  
The white object must  
be within the rectangle  
and have an area of at  
least 10% of the screen.  
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.  
Note  
1)Hunting  
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.  
Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from  
repeated response to automatic iris control.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
If the automatic white balance adjustment  
cannot be made  
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
Possible messages are listed below.  
Manually adjusted lens: set the iris to an appropriate  
setting.  
Lens with automatic iris: set the automatic/manual  
switch on the lens to automatic.  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHT and then  
release the switch.  
White balance adjustment error messages  
Error message  
Meaning  
WHITE : NG  
LOW LEVEL  
The white video level is too low.  
Either open the lens iris or increase  
the gain.  
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
63  
If a memory error occurs  
Error message  
Meaning  
If the error message “: STORED DATA : NG” flashes on  
the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the  
white balance and black balance memory contents have  
been lost.  
WHITE : NG  
COLOR TEMP HIGH  
The color temperature is too high.  
Select a suitable filter setting.  
WHITE : NG  
COLOR TEMP LOW  
The color temperature is too low.  
Select a suitable filter setting.  
Adjust the white balance and black balance again. Contact  
your Sony representative if this message continues to  
appear even after the white balance and black balance have  
been adjusted again.  
WHITE : NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of  
attempts.  
WHITE : NG  
POOR WHITE AREA  
The white area could not be  
checked.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
WHITE : NG  
OVER LEVEL  
The white video level is too high.  
Either stop down the lens iris or  
change the ND filter.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs  
again, an internal check is necessary.  
For information about this internal check, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
If you have no time to adjust the white  
balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. The white balance  
is automatically set as follows, depending on the FILTER  
selector setting.  
• PDW-530/530P:  
B: 3200K, C: 4300 K, D: 6300K  
• PDW-510/510P:  
1: 3200 K, 3: 5600 K  
For details about setting the white balance manually, see  
White balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance  
is next adjusted.  
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B,  
and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically  
stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B)  
of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-  
in filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be  
stored. The number of memories allocated to each of A and  
B can be limited to one by setting the WHT FILTER INH.  
item to “ON” on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, the memory  
contents are not linked to the filter settings.  
If the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, and on the  
FUNCTION 2 page of the OPERATION menu, the  
WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to “ATW”, the ATW  
function is activated to automatically adjust the white  
balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting  
conditions.  
64  
5-2 Adjusting the Black Balance and the White Balance  
the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing  
in synchronization with the frequency of the power  
supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under  
such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color  
flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power  
supply frequency is 60 Hz (with the PDW-510/530) or  
50 Hz (with the PDW-510P/530P). However, if the  
power frequency is 50 Hz (with the PDW-510/530) or 60  
Hz (with the PDW-510P/530P), setting the shutter speed  
to 1/100 or 1/60 can reduce this flicker.  
5-3 Setting the  
Electronic Shutter  
This section describes the shutter modes that can be used  
with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes  
the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter  
mode.  
• When a bright object is shot in EVS mode or ECS mode  
in such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of  
the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent  
characteristic of CCDs. Before using EVS mode or ECS  
mode, check the shooting conditions.  
5-3-1 Shutter Modes  
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic  
shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed  
below.  
You can turn on or off the EVS mode on the SW STATUS  
page of the PAINT menu.  
Selectable shutter modes and shutter speeds  
Shutter  
mode  
Shutter speed  
Application  
5-3-2 Selecting the Shutter Mode  
and Shutter Speed  
Standard  
PDW-510/530: 1/100, For shooting fast-  
1/125, 1/250, 1/500, moving subjects with  
1/1000, 1/2000 (sec.) little blurring.  
PDW-510P/530P:  
1/60, 1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000  
(sec.)  
Use the SHUTTER selector to select a shutter mode or a  
standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in  
ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER selector set to ON  
and the ECS or SLS mode selected, use the MENU knob  
for adjustment.  
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select  
in advance whether or not you use ECS/SLS.  
ECS  
(Extended  
PDW-510/530: 60.0 to For obtaining images  
6000 Hz  
with no horizontal  
Clear Scan) PDW-510P/530P: 50.0 bands of noise when  
to 6000 Hz  
shooting subjects  
such as monitor  
screens.  
Setting the shutter mode and standard-  
mode shutter speed  
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when  
the camcorder power is turned off.  
1)  
1 (1/30 sec for PDW-  
510/530, 1/25 sec for  
PDW-510P/530P) to 8, lighting conditions  
16 frames (1/2 sec for  
For shooting  
subjects in low level  
SLS  
(slow speed  
shutter)  
PDW-510/530, 2/3 sec  
for PDW-510P/530P)  
1
Follow the procedure described in 6-2-2 “Selecting the  
Display Items” (page 85) to set the VF DISPLAY  
MODE item to “2” or “3” on the VF DISP 1 page of  
the USER menu.  
EVS  
Shutter speed  
Improved vertical  
resolution. However,  
the sensitivity and  
dynamic range are  
reduced.  
(Enhanced currently selected in  
Vertical  
definition  
System)  
the Standard or ECS  
mode  
2
Push the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT.  
1) The SLS mode can only be selected when the CCD scan mode(see page  
100) is set to “I (interlace scan)”.  
Notes  
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter,  
the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing  
shutter speed.  
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as  
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of  
field.  
• In SLS (slow speed shutter) mode, the iris is fixed in the  
fully-open position.  
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury  
lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but  
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter  
65  
               
1 2  
Setting the shutter speed in ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
1
Set the shutter speed mode to ECS.  
SHUTTER selector  
For the operation, see the previous item “Setting the  
The current shutter setting indication appears for about  
3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment  
progress message display area of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Examples: “: SS : 1/250”, “: SLS : 8FRAME”, “: ECS  
: 60.0 Hz”  
ECS:60.00Hz  
3
Before the shutter setting indication disappears, push  
the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT again and  
repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears.  
Example of view finder screen display for ECS setting operation  
2
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired frequency appears.  
Pushing the SHUTTER selector down to SELECT  
repeatedly allows you to cycle through the settings of  
mode and speed preselected on the SHT ENABLE  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
Note that all modes and all standard-mode speeds  
listed in the table on page 65 are preselected using the  
SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu.  
By factory default, all available shutter modes and  
shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence shown in  
the following figure. (You can use the SHT ENABLE  
page of the OPERATION menu to make a setting so  
that only the desired (or most frequently used) modes  
and speeds are displayed.)  
The frequency range can be changed between 60.0 and  
6000 Hz (PDW-510/530) or between 50.0 and 6000  
Hz (PDW-510P/530P).  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary  
encoder of the RM-B150.  
Setting the shutter speed in SLS mode  
Proceed as follows.  
Standard mode  
SLS mode  
ECS mode  
1/100: for PDW-510/530  
1/60: for PDW-510P/530P  
1 2  
Setting the shutter speed in SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode  
Setting the shutter speed in ECS mode  
1
Set the shutter speed mode to SLS.  
Proceed as follows.  
66  
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter  
SLS: 1 FRAME  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
OPERATION.  
Example of viewfinder screen display for SLS setting operation  
Press the MENU knob.  
2
Turn the MENU knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
until the desired number of frames appears.  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the OPERATION  
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the  
last accessed page appears.  
The number of frames can be set to values in the range  
1 to 8, and 16. (1 frame nearly equals to 1/30 second  
(PDW-510/530) or 1/25 second (PDW-510P/530P)).  
4
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “SHT ENABLE”, then  
press the MENU knob to display the SHT ENABLE  
page.  
Changing the range of choice of shutter  
mode and speed settings  
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode  
and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance.  
This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the SHT ENABLE page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
Proceed as follows.  
17 SHT ENABLE  
SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
Note  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150  
Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder.  
(This menu display is for the PDW-510/530. For the  
PDW-510P/530P, “SHUTTER 1/60” is displayed  
instead of “SHUTTER 1/100”.)  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
shutter mode or shutter speed you want, then press the  
MENU knob.  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
MENU knob  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Changing the range of choice of shutter mode and speed settings  
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding  
down the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
The TOP menu appears.  
To set another mode or speed, return to step 5.  
Note that only the shutter speeds set to “ON” can be  
selected with the SHUTTER selector.  
5-3 Setting the Electronic Shutter  
67  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
5-4 Changing the  
Reference Value for  
The menu disappears from the screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
Automatic Iris  
Adjustment  
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be  
changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit  
subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights. The reference  
value for the lens iris can be set within the following range  
with respect to the standard value.  
• 0.5: about 0.5 stop further open  
• 1: about 1 stop further open  
• –0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed  
• –1: about 1 stop further closed  
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.  
Changing the reference value  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
If this is the first time the USER menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu  
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears.  
2
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to AUTO IRIS, then press  
the MENU knob to display the AUTO IRIS page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the AUTO IRIS page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
OVERRIDE”, then press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
68  
5-4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment  
     
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
The IRIS OVERRIDE item is set to “ON”.  
5
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the  
cover of the menu operating section.  
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the screen.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value.  
Opening the lens iris  
Iris opened by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
Iris opened by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
Note  
Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not  
ECS.  
Stopping down the lens iris  
Iris stopped down by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
The changed reference value is retained until the  
power of the camcorder is turned off.  
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the  
standard value every time the power is turned on.  
Iris stopped down by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
To open the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
One bar (s) appears in the upper part to the left of the  
F number in the iris indication.  
Adjusting the reference value for automatic iris adjustment  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be used for  
lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does not  
appear.  
To open the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the upper part to the left of  
the F number in the iris indication.  
Selecting the automatic iris window  
Proceed as follows.  
To stop down the iris by 0.5 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front  
of the camera.  
One bar (s) appears in the lower part to the left of the  
F number in the iris indication.  
1
Follow the procedure of steps 1 and 2 described in the  
previous item “Changing the reference value” to  
display the AUTO IRIS page.  
To stop down the iris by 1 stop:  
Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from  
the front of the camera.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
WINDOW IND”, then press the MENU knob.  
Two bars (ss) appear in the lower part to the left of  
the F number in the iris indication.  
The b mark on the left of “IRIS WINDOW IND”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark. The setting is executed.  
The currently selected auto iris window appears on the  
screen.  
If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on  
the screen, set to “OFF”.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “IRIS  
WINDOW”, then press the MENU knob.  
5-4 Changing the Reference Value for Automatic Iris Adjustment  
69  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
5-5 Adjusting the Audio  
Level  
5
Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris  
window appears, then press the MENU knob.  
Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to  
AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio  
signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2. You can  
also adjust the audio level manually.  
The shaded parts indicate the area  
where light detection occurs.  
For the audio level of the signal to be recorded in  
audio channels 3 and 4  
The input levels for audio channels 3 and 4 are either  
automatically adjusted, or are fixed.  
Auto iris window  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
5-5-1 Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Levels of the Audio Inputs  
From the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
Connectors  
If you select “VARIABLE”, the following items  
become effective and you can set the window of the  
desired size. Set each item to the desired size.  
Proceed as follows to adjust the audio levels of the audio  
inputs from the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors, which  
are to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.  
Item  
Setting  
IRIS VAR WIDTH The width of the window  
IRIS VAR  
HEIGHT  
The height of the window  
With the XLR connection automatic detection function  
being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or CH2 connector, the input from these connectors is  
automatically selected for audio recording. In this case,  
start the operation from step 2.  
When the XLR connection automatic detection mode is  
off, start the operation from step 1.  
IRIS VAR H POS. The position of the window in the  
horizontal direction  
IRIS VAR V POS. The position of the window in the  
vertical direction.  
6
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the  
cover of the menu operating section.  
You can turn on and off the XLR connection automatic  
detection function on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
The menu disappears from the screen and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
To counter problems with very bright  
highlights  
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much,  
leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be  
blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function  
on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from  
the automatic iris correction.  
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP  
HIGH LIGHT item to “ON”.  
3
2
1
MIC LEVEL control  
Manual adjustment of the audio levels of channels 1 and 2  
70  
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level  
       
1
To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1 or  
AUDIO IN CH2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH-1  
or AUDIO IN CH-2 switch to REAR. To adjust both  
input signals, set both switches to REAR.  
5-5-2 Manually Adjusting the Audio  
Level of the Front Microphone  
You can adjust the audio level input from the front  
microphone connected to the MIC IN connector, which is  
to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to  
the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
With the LEVEL control for the channel selected in  
step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to  
–20 dB for a normal input volume.  
Note  
If the XLR connection automatic detection mode is on,  
when the cables are connected to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
connectors, the camcorder detects the connection to the  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. Thus, the AUDIO IN  
switches are internally reset to REAR and the audio signals  
input to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors are  
automatically selected.  
The second bar from the top may turn on occasionally,  
but do not allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the  
audio level is too high.  
Before adjusting the audio level of the front microphone,  
confirm that no cables are connected to the AUDIO IN  
CH1/CH2 connectors. Alternatively, set the REAR XLR  
AUTO item to “OFF” on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
All bars go on.  
These bars go on.  
Excessive input level  
Normal input level  
Correspondence between recording level  
adjustments and audio level controls  
In the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you  
can select which audio level control controls the audio  
recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH1/  
CH2 connectors. The correspondence between the controls  
and the menu items and settings is as follows.  
2
Level to be Control  
adjusted  
Menu item Setting  
1
3
Channel-1 LEVEL (CH-1) control REAE1/  
SIDE1  
recording  
level  
(on the left)  
WRR  
LEVEL  
MIC LEVEL control  
FRONT  
F+S1  
1
Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) to  
FRONT as follows:  
LEVEL (CH-1) control  
is linked with MIC  
LEVEL control.  
• When using the front microphone input for both  
channels 1 and 2, set both AUDIO IN switches to  
FRONT.  
• When using the front microphone input for either  
channel 1 or 2, set the AUDIO IN switch for the  
desired channel to FRONT.  
Channel-2 LEVEL (CH-2) control REAE2/  
SIDE2  
recording  
level  
(on the right)  
WRR  
LEVEL  
MIC LEVEL control  
FRONT  
F+S2  
LEVEL (CH-2) control  
is linked with MIC  
LEVEL control.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired  
channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL.  
Note  
When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2)  
controls and MIC LEVEL control linked together, if the  
MIC LEVEL control is set to 0, the audio signals on  
channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of  
the MIC LEVEL control before adjusting the LEVEL  
(CH-1/CH-2) controls.  
Turn the MIC LEVEL control, and adjust so that the  
audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal  
input volume.  
• The 10 bars from the bottom among 20 bars go on  
with the normal input volume.  
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level  
71  
   
• The second top bar may turn on occasionally, but do  
not allow the top bar to go on. If it goes on, the audio  
level is too high.  
Note  
The type of audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 does  
not depend on the XLR connection automatic detection  
function. It is determined only by the switch settings.  
Correspondence between recording level  
adjustments and audio level controls  
In the AUDIO-3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you  
can select which audio level control controls the audio  
recording level of the front microphone input. The  
correspondence between the controls and the menu items  
and settings is as follows.  
F: The audio signal from the front microphone  
is recorded.  
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1  
connector is recorded.  
W:The audio signal of the wireless microphone  
is recorded.  
Level to be Control  
adjusted  
Menu item Setting  
F: Same as with the CH3 switch.  
R: The audio signal input to the AUDIO IN CH2  
connector is recorded.  
W:Same as with the CH3 switch.  
Channel-1 MIC LEVEL control  
MIC CH1  
LEVEL  
FRONT  
SIDE  
recording  
LEVEL (CH-1) control  
level  
(on the left)  
LEVEL (CH-1) control  
is linked with MIC  
LEVEL control.  
F+S1  
Audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4  
Channel-2 MIC LEVEL control  
MIC CH2  
LEVEL  
FRONT  
SIDE2  
recording  
LEVEL (CH-2) control  
level  
(on the right)  
LEVEL (CH-2) control  
is linked with MIC  
LEVEL control.  
F+S1  
Note  
When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL control and  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls linked together, if the  
LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls are set to 0, the audio  
signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the  
position of the LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) controls before  
adjusting the MIC LEVEL control.  
5-5-3 Recording Audio on Channels  
3 and 4  
Selecting the recorded audio  
You can select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and  
4 with the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches, or you can  
have the selection made automatically, as follows.  
To automatically select the same audio as on  
channels 1 and 2  
In the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set  
the AUDIO CH3/4 MODE item to “CH 1/2”.  
Adjusting the audio recording levels  
In the AUDIO-2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, set  
the AU CH34 AGC MODE item as follows.  
For automatic adjustment: select “STREO” or  
“MONO”.  
For fixed settings: select “OFF”.  
72  
5-5 Adjusting the Audio Level  
 
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps  
running, regardless of the operating state of the  
VDR.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs  
only while recording.  
5-6 Setting the Time  
Data  
To set the drop frame mode/non-drop frame  
mode (only for the PDW-510/530)  
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop  
frame (NDF) mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
USER menu or OPERATION menu or on the TIMECODE  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
5-6-1 Setting the Time Code  
The time code setting range is from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23  
: 59 : 59 : 29 (hours : minutes : seconds : frames) for the  
PDW-510/530, and from 00 : 00 : 00 : 00 to 23 : 59 : 59 :  
24 for the PDW-510P/530P.  
To make the time code consecutive  
To set the time code, proceed as follows.  
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN,  
recording a number of scenes on the disc normally  
produces consecutive time code. However, once you  
remove the disc and record on another disc, the time code  
will no longer be contiguous when you use again the  
original disc for recording. In this case, to make the time  
code consecutive, proceed as follows.  
1
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.  
Press the RET button on the lens.  
1
RESET  
button  
THUMBNAIL  
SEL/SET  
This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the  
internal time code generator, thus allowing the new  
time code recorded to follow on consecutively.  
ESSENCE MARK  
S.SEL  
SUB CLIP  
4
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
5-6-2 Saving the Actual Time in the  
Time Code  
2
3
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK  
saves the actual time in the time code.  
When it is necessary to set the actual time, use the TIME/  
DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS menu.  
Setting the time code  
1
2
3
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
5-6-3 Setting the User Bits  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The first (leftmost) digit of time code flashes.  
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you  
can record user information such as the date, time, or scene  
number on the time code track.  
4
Use the SEL/SET dial to set the time code value.  
To change the value of the flashing digit, turn the dial,  
and to shift to the next digit, press the dial. Repeat this  
until all desired digits are set.  
To set the user bits, proceed as follows.  
To reset the time code value to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET button.  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-  
RUN.  
5-6 Setting the Time Data  
73  
                 
regeneration of an external time code. You can also  
synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders/  
VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.  
Connections for time code  
synchronization  
Connect both the reference video signal and the external  
time code as illustrated below.  
1
RESET  
button  
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code  
THUMBNAIL  
SEL/SET  
S.SEL  
ESSENCE MARK  
SUB CLIP  
3
CLIP MENU  
SHIFT  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
Reference video signal  
2,4  
Setting the user bits  
TC IN  
External time code  
1
2
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT.  
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The first (leftmost) digit flashes.  
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders  
for time code synchronization  
3
Use the SEL/SET dial to set the user bit data.  
To change the value of the flashing digit, turn the dial,  
and to shift to the next digit, press the dial. Repeat this  
until all desired digits are set.  
TEST OUT  
Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as follows:  
TC OUT  
Reference camcorder  
Hexadecimal  
Display  
A
B
C
D
E
F
TC IN  
A
b
C
d
E
F
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
TC OUT  
To reset the user bit data to 00:00:00:00  
Press the RESET button.  
TEST OUT  
1)  
GENLOCK IN  
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-  
RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for  
the time code generator.  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
TEST OUT  
The set user bit data will be recorded for both LTC and  
VITC.  
To another camcorder to be synchronized  
To store the user bit setting in memory  
The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is  
automatically retained in memory even when the power is  
turned off.  
1) Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
Procedure for time code synchronization  
To synchronize the time code, proceed as follows.  
5-6-4 Synchronizing the Time Code  
You can synchronize the internal time code generator of  
this camcorder with an external generator for the  
74  
5-6 Setting the Time Data  
   
time code cannot be synchronized with the reference  
video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK ON/OFF  
item to “ON” on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
4
3
User bit settings during time code  
synchronization  
When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is  
synchronized with the external time code value. Therefore,  
the user bits can have their own settings for each  
camcorder. You can also synchronize the user bits with  
external user bit data.  
1
2
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
To release the time code synchronization  
First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
5
To change the power supply from the battery  
pack to an external power supply during time  
code synchronization  
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the  
external power supply to the DC IN connector before  
removing the battery pack. You may lose time code  
synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.  
Synchronizing the time code  
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the POWER switch.  
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.  
Set the DISPLAY switch to TC.  
Camera synchronization during time code  
synchronization  
During time code synchronization, the camera is  
genlocked to the reference video signal input from the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal  
complying with the SMPTE (for PDW-510/530) or  
EBU (for PDW-510P/530P) standard and in proper  
phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the  
GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.  
This operation synchronizes the internal time code  
generator with the external time code. After about 10  
seconds, you can disconnect the external time code  
without losing the synchronization. However, there  
will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or  
disconnect the time code signal during recording.  
Notes  
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal time  
code is immediately synchronized with the external time  
code and the counter display will show the value of the  
external time code. However, wait for a few seconds  
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.  
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the  
same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the  
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the  
internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the  
external time code.  
• When the GENLOCK ON/OFF item is set to “OFF” on  
the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the  
5-6 Setting the Time Data  
75  
76  
5-6 Setting the Time Data  
Menu Displays and  
Detailed Settings  
6
Chapter  
For details of customizing the USER menu, see 6-1-4  
6-1 Menu Organization  
and Operation  
TOP menu  
The TOP menu consists of the following submenus.  
<TOP MENU>  
6-1-1 Menu Organization  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
The following shows the organization of menus that you  
can use to make various settings and adjustments.  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
TOP MENU  
USER  
00.CONTENTS  
01.OUTPUT  
The USER menu consists of  
the pages shown on the right.  
If required, you can add,  
When you select an item in the TOP menu, this displays  
the most recently shown page of the corresponding  
submenu. When the submenu is selected for the first time,  
the 00 CONTENTS page appears.  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
delete, or rearrange pages  
1)  
(USER menu customization).  
In this case the number, for  
example, 01, also changes.  
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
11.SHOT ID  
Submenus selected in the TOP menu  
These are the following menus.  
• USER menu:  
12.SHOT DISP  
13.SET STATUS  
14.LENS FILE  
15.USER FILE  
This menu includes monitor output settings, viewfinder  
settings, and commonly used functions. This menu is  
normally displayed when the MENU ON/OFF switch is  
changed to ON.  
This menu used to  
add or delete pages in  
the USER group.  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
• USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu:  
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from  
the USER menu to suit your needs.  
• Each menu consists of pages 00  
CONTENTS, 01 xxx, 02 xxx, and  
so on.  
• You can select the desired items  
from these menus to create new  
pages, which you can add to the  
USER menu.  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
• ALL menu:  
This menu contains all items of the OPERATION menu,  
PAINT menu, MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
DIAGNOSIS  
1) In this manual, the USER menu consisting of items and pages registered  
at the factory is used.  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
77  
           
• OPERATION menu:  
Displaying menus on the color LCD  
With the camcorder powered on, proceed as follows.  
This menu contains items for changing settings according  
to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is  
being operated.  
1
2
Open the cover of the menu operating section, and set  
the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.  
• PAINT menu  
This menu contains items for making detailed image  
adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor  
the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video  
engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although  
you can also use an external remote control panel or master  
setup unit to set the items on this menu, this menu is  
effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors.  
Set the DISP SEL switch at the lower left of the color  
LCD to CHAR.  
This displays menus on the color LCD.  
In the remainder of this section, the viewfinder display is  
generally shown as an example menu display, but the  
display on the color LCD is similar.  
• MAINTENANCE menu  
This menu contains items for performing camera  
maintenance operations, such as changing the VDR  
system or using infrequently used “paint” items.  
6-1-3 Basic Menu Operations  
When you open the cover of the menu operating section,  
the MENU ON/OFF switch appears. If the MENU ON/  
OFF switch is set to ON, the USER menu is displayed on  
the screen. Closing the cover automatically sets the MENU  
ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
• FILE menu  
This menu is for performing file operations, such as  
writing the reference file.  
• DIAGNOSIS menu  
This menu enables you to confirm the VDR status or  
identify a failed circuit board.  
6-1-2 Displaying Menus  
The camcorder can display menus both on the viewfinder  
screen and on the color LCD.  
Viewfinder  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
MENU ON/OFF  
switch  
ColorLCD  
DISP SEL  
switch  
Cover of the menu  
MENU knob  
operating section  
The MENU ON/OFF switch  
is inside the cover.  
Controls used for the basic use of the menu oerations  
POWER switch  
Displaying the TOP menu  
Hold down the MENU button, and move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from the OFF to the ON position.  
Displaying menus on the viewfinder screen  
When the camcorder is powered on, open the cover of the  
menu operating section, and set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to the ON position.  
This displays menus on the viewfinder screen, regardless  
of the ON/OFF setting of the viewfinder DISPLAY  
switch.  
Note  
Depending on the internal switch settings, display of the  
TOP menu may be disabled.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
78  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
         
2 Press the MENU knob.  
Returning to the TOP menu from other  
menus  
The selected page is displayed. Go to step 4.  
There are two methods.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Press the MENU knob.  
• Align the b mark with “TOP” at the top right of the  
menu page, and press the MENU knob.  
• Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to the  
ESCAPE position repeatedly until the TOP menu  
appears.  
A b mark appears on the left of the item currently  
selected on the page.  
U08 GAIN SW  
TOP  
Menu operations in the USER menu  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
:
:
:
:
0db  
9db  
18db  
42db  
This section explains operations on the USER menu. But  
the operations are the same as those on menus other than  
the USER menu. Also, if the optional extension boards are  
not installed in your camcorder, some items on the USER  
menu pages are not displayed. But the operations are the  
same as those on the menus other than the USER menu.  
To carry out menu operations in the USER menu, proceed  
as follows.  
TURBO SW IND.  
:
OFF  
4
5
Turn the move MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired item.  
1
Switch the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
• Turning the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen  
from the front of the camera moves the b mark up  
continuously.  
• Turning the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the  
front of the camera moves the b mark down  
continuously.  
The USER menu normally appears. If it does not, in  
the TOP menu select USER, and press the MENU  
knob.  
U03 FUNCTION1  
TOP  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
TURBO SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
OFF  
Press the MENU knob.  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
DF/NDF  
CACHE/INTVAL REC:  
U08 GAIN SW  
TOP  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
:
:
0db  
9db  
:? 18db  
(For the PDW-530P/510P, the DF/NDF item is not  
included.)  
:
42db  
TURBO SW IND.  
:
OFF  
If the USER menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2.  
If this is the first time the USER menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu  
appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.  
6
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.  
Before going to the next step, you can cancel a change  
or return to the standard settings. For this operation,  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired page number.  
This indicates that  
the menu screen  
U00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
can be scrolled.  
To interrupt changing the settings  
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
By setting the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF, the  
menu disappears from the screen. By setting the  
MENU ON/OFF switch to ON again, the values that  
were displayed when you interrupted the setting  
operations will reappear so you can continue making  
settings.  
b mark  
7
Press the MENU knob.  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
79  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark. The setting is confirmed.  
To end menu operations  
You can end menu operations using the following two  
methods:  
• Turn the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF.  
• Close the cover of the menu operating section. When  
you close the cover, the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to  
OFF automatically.  
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen (when the  
viewfinder DISPLAY switch is set to ON or the VF DISP  
item on the VF DISP 1 page of the USER menu is set to  
“ON”).  
8
To continue setting other items in the same page,  
repeat steps from 4 to 7.  
To cancel a change or return to the standard  
settings  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Before pressing the MENU button in step 7 of the  
above procedure, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE  
switch up to the CANCEL/PRST position.  
For details of the viewfinder display , see 6-2-2 “Selecting  
Under the page name, a message “CANCEL DATA  
OK?” appears.  
2
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the  
CANCEL/PRST position once more.  
6-1-4 Editing the USER Menu  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to  
configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and  
items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the  
pages.  
A message “CANCEL DATA” appears to indicate that  
the change has been canceled.  
To return to the standard settings, push the CANCEL/  
PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/PRST  
position.  
Adding a new page  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add  
a new page to the USER menu.  
A message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears on the  
screen.  
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the  
USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages and the ASSIGN  
SEL EDIT page are all blank in their initial state. You can  
register up to 10 items, including blank lines, on each of  
these pages.  
4
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch up to the  
CANCEL/PRST position once more.  
This returns to the standard settings.  
To add a new page, proceed as follows.  
Depending on the setting item, in some cases only the  
function to return to the standard setting is valid. Check  
this for each individual item.  
1
2
While holding down the MENU knob, move the  
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the  
ON position.  
To move to another page  
Proceed as follows.  
The TOP menu appears.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
MENU CUSTOMIZE”, then press the MENU knob.  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b arrow to the page  
number, then press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
menu appears.  
If the b mark is placed at a position other than the page  
number, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
to ESCAPE.  
A ? mark appears in front of the page number. The  
camcorder is now in page selecting mode.  
U00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
01.EDIT PAGE  
02.USER 1  
03.USER 2  
04.USER 3  
05.USER 4  
06.USER 5  
07.USER 6  
08.USER 7  
09.USER 8  
10.USER 9  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
Press the MENU knob when the desired page appears.  
80  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
     
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
The USER P2 EDIT page appears again,  
displaying the newly added item.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to one of USER 1 EDIT to  
USER 19 EDIT and ASSIGN SEL EDIT, then press  
the MENU knob to display the page.  
7
Add the remaining items by repeating steps 4 to 6.  
You can add up to 10 items on one page.  
Deleting items from a page by using the CANCEL/  
PRST / ESCAPE switch  
You can delete items from any of the USER 1 EDIT to  
USER 19 EDIT pages. Proceed as follows.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the desired page appears, then press the MENU  
knob to select the page.  
Example: When you select the USER 2 EDIT page  
1
Open one of the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT  
pages from which you want to delete items. Turn the  
MENU knob to move the b mark to the item to be  
deleted.  
U03 USER 2 EDIT  
TOP  
2
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST.  
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears.  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST again.  
4
Move the b mark to the item to be added (this  
operation is unnecessary, if no item exists on the page  
as shown in the figure for step 3), then press the  
MENU knob.  
The item is deleted.  
Deleting items from a page by using the menu  
Proceed as follows.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
EDIT FUNCTION  
INSERT  
MOVE  
DELETE  
BLANK  
ESC  
1
2
Move the b mark to the item to be deleted, and press  
the MENU knob.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
Select “DELETE”, and press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE OK? Yes b No” appears at the  
upper right.  
5
6
Move the b mark to “INSERT”, and press the MENU  
knob.  
3
To delete, turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.  
The page for the last added item appears.  
Replacing items on a page  
You can replace the items on any of the USER 1 EDIT to  
USER 5 EDIT pages. Proceed as follows.  
P25 BLACK/FLARE  
ESC  
MASTER BLACK  
R GLACK  
B BLACK  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON  
1
Open one of the USER 1 EDIT to USER 5 EDIT pages  
on which you want to replace items. Turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to the item to be replaced,  
then press the MENU knob.  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
TEST OUT SELECT :  
ENC  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
Add the items.  
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the  
2
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again.  
desired items appears, then press the MENU knob.  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired item, then press the MENU knob.  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
81  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
position where you want to move the item, then press  
the MENU knob.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “EDIT PAGE”, then press  
the MENU knob to display the EDIT PAGE screen.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the EDIT PAGE screen appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
E02 USER 1 EDIT  
WHITE<B>CH  
TOP  
AWB  
OFF  
:
:
TEST OUT MENU  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
TOP  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
OFF  
3200  
0
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
MASTER BLACK  
<A>:  
<A>:  
:
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
0
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
The item selected in step 1 moves to the position that  
you selected in step 3.  
In the above example, “MASTER BLACK” is moved  
to the top and the other items are moved down one line.  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to where  
you want to add the page, then press the MENU knob.  
Inserting a blank line  
You can insert a blank line above the selected item.  
Proceed as follows.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
EDIT FUNCTION  
INSERT  
MOVE  
DELETE  
BLANK  
ESC  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
above which you want to insert a blank line.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
2
Select “BLANK”, and press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and a  
blank line is inserted above the specified item.  
5
6
Select INSERT, and press the MENU knob.  
The selection screen appears.  
Note  
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items  
have already been registered.  
CONTENTS  
ESC  
01.USER PAGE 1  
02.USER PAGE 2  
03.USER PAGE 3  
04.USER PAGE 4  
05.USER PAGE 5  
06.USER PAGE 6  
07.USER PAGE 7  
08.USER PAGE 8  
09.USER PAGE 9  
Adding/deleting/replacing pages  
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page  
from the USER menu or replace pages, using the EDIT  
PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.  
To add a page  
Proceed as follows.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired page, then press the MENU knob.  
1
While holding down the MENU knob, move the  
MENU ON/OFF switch from the OFF position to the  
ON position.  
This adds the number and name of the selected page  
above the item selected in step 4.  
To cancel adding a page  
The TOP menu appears.  
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the  
screen, then press the MENU knob.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
MENU CUSTOMIZE”, then press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
menu appears. If the menu has been used before, the  
last accessed page appears.  
To delete a page by using the CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
Proceed as follows.  
82  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
1
2
Open the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu. Turn the MENU knob to move  
the b mark to the page to be deleted.  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
PUSH TO PAGE INSERT  
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.'!'LED  
06.MARKER 1  
07.GAIN SW  
08.VF SETTING  
09.AUTO IRIS  
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST.  
The message “PRESET DATA OK?” appears.  
E01 EDIT PAGE  
DELETE PAGE OK ?  
01.OUTPUT  
02.TEST OUT  
03.FUNCTION 1  
04.VF DISP 1  
05.VF DISP 2  
06.'!'LED  
07.MARKER 1  
08.GAIN SW  
09.VF SETTING  
10.AUTO IRIS  
4
Press the MENU knob.  
The page selected in step 1 is moved to the position  
selected in step 3.  
In the above example,”AUTO IRIS” moves to the  
“04” position and the “VF DISP 1” and following  
items move down one line.  
3
Push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch to  
CANCEL/PRST again.  
In the above example, the VF DISP 2 page is deleted.  
To delete a page by using the menu  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
3
On the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu, move the b mark to the page to  
be deleted, and press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
Select DELETE, and press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE PAGE OK?” appears at the upper  
right.  
To delete, turn the menu knob to move the b mark to  
“YES”, and press the MENU knob.  
To move a page  
Proceed as follows.  
1
Display the EDIT PAGE screen of the USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE menu. Turn the MENU knob to move  
the b mark to the page that you want to move.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
2
3
Select MOVE, then press the MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.  
Turn MENU knob to move the b mark to the position  
to where you want to move the page selected in step 1.  
6-1 Menu Organization and Operation  
83  
1)  
b Zoom position  
2)  
This indicates the approximate position of the variator of  
the zoom lens, between wide angle and telephoto.  
6-2 Status Display on  
the Viewfinder  
Screen  
1) Zoom position  
This indicator appears only when you use a lens that has a zoom position  
display function.  
2) Variator  
A group of lenses that are moved to adjust the focal length.  
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture  
but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder  
settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone  
marker, etc.  
When the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to OFF and the  
DISPLAY switch is set to ON, the items for which an  
“ON” setting was made in the VF DISP1 page of the  
USER menu or with related switches are displayed at the  
top and bottom of the screen. The messages that give  
details of the settings and adjustment progress and results  
can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while  
settings are being changed, during adjustment, and after  
adjustment.  
c Color temperature  
This indicates the currently selected color temperature.  
d UHF wireless microphone reception level  
This indicates reception level of the wireless microphone  
when the UHF wireless microphone is attached, using four  
x which appear at the right of “W”. When four x are lit,  
the receiving condition is good.  
e DC IN / battery voltage or remaining capacity  
This shows the battery voltage or remaining capacity of an  
internal battery pack.  
When the power is supplied from an AC adaptor connected  
to the DC IN connector, “DC IN” appears.  
When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “INT” on  
the VF DISP 2 page of the USER menu, the battery voltage  
is not indicated. However, when the Anton Bauer  
intelligent battery system or the BP-IL75/GL95/M100  
battery pack is used, the remaining battery capacity is  
automatically detected and indicated as a percentage even  
when the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to “OFF”. The  
indicated value changes in steps of 10 %.  
For information about the display item selection, ssee 6-2-  
information about setting change and adjustment progress  
87. For information about marker display, see 6-2-4  
• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40 %,  
the indications MAX, 90 %, 80 %...40 % are displayed  
for three seconds in the viewfinder each time the  
remaining battery capacity reduces by 10 %.  
6-2-1 Layout of the Status Display  
on the Viewfinder Screen  
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
are shown below.  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40 %,  
the indication is displayed all the time.  
1)  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10 % ,  
the the indication flashes. When the remaining battery  
capacity is reduced further, the LOW indication flashes.  
16:9  
1) This value can be set to either 10 % or 20 % on the FUNCTION 2 page of  
the OPERATION menu.  
PDW-530  
#30001  
f 16:9 mode recording indicator  
This indicates recording in the 16:9 mode. This indicator is  
recorded together with the color bars.  
D5600  
IMX50  
g Setting change and adjustment progress message  
display area  
6, qj, qk, ql and wa appear only when color bars are displayed.  
Status indications in the viewfinder  
a Extender  
h Operation/error message display area  
“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is used.  
84  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
         
i Iris setting/auto iris override  
m Gain  
This indicates the f-stop (iris setting) of the lens.  
Also, the auto iris override is displayed using bars which  
appear in the upper and lower parts to the left of the F  
number respectively.  
This indicates the gain of the video amplifier, as set by the  
GAIN selector.  
n White balance memory  
This indicates the currently selected white balance  
automatic adjustment memory.  
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.  
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.  
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST  
or when the preset button on the RM-B150 has been  
pushed.  
j Remaining disc capacity  
This indicator indicates the remaining disc recording time  
(in minutes) of the VDR.  
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.  
Examples of remaining disc recording time indication  
o Filter  
Indication  
F - 30  
Remaining disc recording time  
Full to 30 minutes  
30 to 25 minutes  
25 to 20 minutes  
20 to 15 minutes  
15 to 10 minutes  
10 to 5 minutes  
5 to 4 minutes  
This indicates the currently selected filter types.  
30 - 25  
p Time code  
This indicates the time code, user bits or other information  
selected by the DISPLAY switch.  
25 - 20  
20 - 15  
15 - 10  
q ID number  
This indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4.  
The ID number is recorded together with the color bars.  
10 - 5  
5 MIN  
4 MIN  
4 to 3 minutes  
r Date and time  
This indicates the date and time of recording, which are  
recorded together with the color bars.  
3 MIN  
3 to 2 minutes  
2 MIN  
2 to 1 minutes  
1 (flashing)  
0 MIN (flashing)  
1 to 0 minute  
s Model name and serial number  
This indicates the model name and serial number of the  
camcorder, which are recorded together with the color  
bars.  
0 minute  
k Audio level  
These indicate the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2.  
The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as  
follows to the audio level when an 1-kHz sine wave is  
input.  
t 16:9/4:3 mode  
“16:9” or “4:3” is displayed depending on the currently  
selected aspect ratio.  
Audio channel 1  
level indicator  
Audio channel 2  
level indicator  
u *  
This flashes when the color bars are displayed and is  
recorded together with the color bars  
VDR level meter  
indicator  
v Recording format  
This indicates the current recording format.  
l Shutter speed  
w D5600 indication  
This appears when the electric 5600 K color temperature  
filter function is on.  
This indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode.  
However, if the SHUTTER selector is set to OFF, nothing  
is displayed.  
1/100 (PDW-510/530) or 1/60 (PDW-510P/530P), 1/125,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed (in  
seconds) in standard mode  
6-2-2 Selecting the Display Items  
ECS: ECS mode  
EVS: EVS mode  
1F to 8F, 16F: Number of frames in SLS mode  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen from the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the  
USER menu, turn on or off the indication next to each  
item.  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
85  
   
2) For detailed information on the display mode, see 6-2-3 “Display Modes  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen, proceed as follows.  
VF DISP 2 page  
Item  
Description  
DISP ZOOM  
Zoom position indicator  
Displays the color temperature.  
DISP COLOR  
TEMP.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
DISP BATT  
REMAIN  
Displays the battery voltage/  
1)  
remaining capacity of an internal  
battery pack or an external battery  
connected to the DC IN connector.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
DISP DC IN  
Displayed when the power is supplied  
from an external battery connected to  
the DC IN connector.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
Displays the 16:9/4:3 mode indicator.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
DISP WRR RF LVL Displays the reception level of the  
wireless microphone.  
DISP TIME CODE  
Displays the time code.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP  
2 page appears, and press the MENU knob to select the  
page.  
DISP REC FORMAT Displays the recording format.  
1) When an Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery System or the BP-IL75/GL95/  
M100 battery pack is used, the setting of this item determines the display  
as follows.  
INT: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage when there  
is a change, and when the capacity is low.  
AUTO: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage, except  
that when this is impossible the battery voltage appears.  
VOLT: The battery voltage is shown.  
U04 VF DISP 1  
VF DISP  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
3
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP DISC  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
DISP IRIS  
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
VF DISP 1 page  
You can select the following items to be displayed on  
the screen on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page.  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether the selected  
item should appear in the viewfinder display (the  
“ON” setting), or not appear (the “OFF” setting), and  
press the MENU knob.  
VF DISP 1 page  
Item  
Description  
VF DISP  
Turning on or off the viewfinder  
display  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes a  
the b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
1)  
2)  
VF DISPLAY MODE  
Selecting the display mode  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
Extender indicator  
Note that pressing the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE  
switch to CANCEL/PRST on this page has no effect.  
Types of the ND filter  
White balance memory indicator  
Gain indicator  
5
6
To set another item to “ON” or “OFF”, repeat steps 3  
and 4.  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
Shutter speed and ECS mode  
indicator  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP DISC  
DISP IRIS  
Audio level indicator  
Remaining disc capacity indicator  
Iris opening indicator  
1) The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY  
switch on the viewfinder.  
86  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
2
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “VF  
6-2-3 Display Modes and Setting  
Change Confirmation/  
Adjustment Progress  
Messages  
DISPLAY MODE”, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “VF DISPLAY MODE”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired display mode  
appears, and press the MENU knob.  
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of  
setting changes and adjustment progress and results by  
setting a display mode.  
The conditions under which messages are displayed and  
their correspondence with the display mode are as follows:  
The z mark on the left of “VF DISPLAY MODE”  
changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a z mark.  
Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress messages  
and display modes  
Y: Message is displayed.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
N: Message is not displayed.  
Message  
display  
condition  
Message  
Display  
mode  
setting  
6-2-4 Setting the Marker Display  
1
2
3
Use the MARKER 1 page of the USER menu to switch the  
display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and  
to select whether the area indicated by the safety zone  
marker is 80%, 90% or 100% of the screen area.  
When the filter  
selection has  
been changed  
ND : n, CC : m (where n =  
1, 2, 3, 4, m = A, B, C, D)  
N
N
Y
When the gain  
setting has been 0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB,12dB,  
changed  
GAIN : n (where n = -3dB,  
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
18dB, 24dB, 30dB, 36dB,  
42dB, 48dB)  
When the  
WHITE : n (where n = A  
CH, B CH, PRESET) or  
ATW : RUN  
setting of the  
WHITE BAL  
switch has been  
changed  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
When the  
DCC : ON (or OFF)  
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
OUTPUT/DCC  
selector has  
been set to DCC  
ON or OFF  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
When the  
shutter speed  
and mode  
SS : 1/100 (PDW-510/530)  
or 1/60 (PDW-510P/530P)  
(or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
setting has been 1/1000, 1/2000,ECS, SLS)  
1)  
Turn the MENU knob until the MARKER 1 page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
changed  
When the black E.g. WHITE : OK  
or white balance  
has been  
N
Y
Y
U07 MARKER 1  
MARKER  
TOP  
OFF  
adjusted  
:
CENTER  
:
:
:
:
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
90%  
OFF  
4:3  
OFF  
1/4  
OFF  
1) This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER selector is  
set to ON.  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
ASPECT MASK LVL :  
100% MARKER  
Changing the display mode  
:
The currently set display mode appears on the VF DISP 1  
page of the USER menu. To change it, proceed as follows.  
You can set the following items on the MARKER 1  
page.  
1
Follow steps 1 and 2 in 6-2-2 “Selecting the Display  
Items” on page 85, until the VF DISP 1 page of the  
USER menu appears on the screen.  
Item  
MARKER  
Description  
Not to display all markers, set to OFF.  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
87  
         
Item  
Description  
CENTER  
To display the center marker, set to ON.  
To display the safety zone, set to ON.  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
To select the safety zone range (80%,  
90%, 92.5 % or 95 %), when SAFETY  
ZONE is set to ON.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
ASPECT  
To display the aspect marker, set to ON.  
To select the type of the aspect marker.  
ASPECT  
SELECT  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
ASPECT MASK  
(4:3)  
To make the areas out of the selected  
aspect marker dimmer, set to ON.  
1)  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
ASPECT MASK  
LVL  
To set the mask level (1/2, 1/4 or 1/8),  
when the ASPECT MASK is set to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
100 % MARKER To display the effective pixel area, set to  
ON.  
Turn the MENU knob until the VF SETTING page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
1) The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the  
viewfinder. When R, G, or B is selected for the TEST OUT SELECT item  
from the menu, the same video signal is output to the viewfinder and the  
TEST OUT connector. Thus, when the ASPECT MASK (4:3) item is set  
to “ON” with R/G/B selected, the masked video signal is output to the  
TEST OUT connector.  
U09 VF SETTING  
ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
:
:
OFF  
1
ZEBRA1 DET.LEVEL:  
ZEBRA1 APT.LEVEL:  
ZEBRA2 DET.LEVEL:  
70%  
10%  
100%  
3
Perform the settings for each item.  
VF DETAIL LEVEL :  
OFF  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
item you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes  
to the z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
VF ASPECT  
:
AUTO  
You can set the following items on the VF SETTING  
page.  
Item  
ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
Description  
2 Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and  
press the MENU knob.  
1)  
Turns the zebra display on or off.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes  
to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or BOTH.  
ZEBRA 1 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1 (70%)  
display.  
ZEBRA 1 APT. LVL Adjusts the aperture level of the zebra  
1 display. (1 to 10 to 20)  
4
5
To continue setting other items, repeat step 3.  
ZEBRA 2 DET. LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2 (100%)  
display.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the  
2)  
viewfinder (–99 to 0 to 99).  
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
Turns the VF detail function on or off  
and adjusts the level.  
VF ASPECT  
Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio.  
3)  
(AUTO/16:9)  
6-2-5 Setting the Viewfinder  
1) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA  
switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the  
viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the  
ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective.  
2) The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded image.  
3) When the VF ASPECT item is set to “AUTO”, this is linked to the 16:9/  
4:3 selection on the FORMAT page.  
Use the VF SETTING page of the USER menu to select  
items related to the viewfinder.  
When the VF ASPECT item is set to “16:9”, but “4:3” is selected on the  
FORMAT page, then it is not possible to mix the zebra display and marker  
display signals on the output signal from the TEST OUT connector.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press the MENU knob.  
88  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
   
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
U12 SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME :  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
:
:
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
:
:
:
4
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
SHOT BLINK CHARA:  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP  
page.  
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
Item  
Description  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
SHOT DATE  
Selects whether or not the shot data is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT TIME  
Selects whether or not shot time is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
SHOT MODEL  
NAME  
Selects whether or not the model name  
is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
SHOT SERIAL  
NO.  
Selects whether or not the serial  
number is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
6-2-6 Recording Shot Data  
Superimposed on the Color  
Bars  
1)  
Selects whether or not the shot ID set  
on the SHOT ID page is superimposed  
(1 to 4 or OFF).  
SHOT ID SEL  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
Selects whether or not the 16:9 mode  
indicator is superimposed (ON or OFF).  
In the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu, you can select  
which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color  
bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to 4) set  
in the SHOT DATA page is recorded superimposed on the  
picture.  
SHOT BLINK  
CHARA  
Selects whether or not the blinking * is  
superimposed (ON or OFF).  
1) To carry out superimposed recording, select the SHOT ID number (1 to 4).  
Not to carry out superimposed recording, select “OFF”.  
Proceed as follows.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to  
record the selected item superimposed on the color  
bars, and press the MENU knob.  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
Selecting the shot data for superimposed recording  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
5
6
To continue setting other items, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT DISP page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
To carry out superimposed recording  
To actually record the items selected for superimposed  
recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC  
switch to BARS, DCC OFF.  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
89  
   
The items selected for superimposed recording appear on  
the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color  
bars.  
A x mark appears over the first character position in  
the string, and characters can now be input.  
U11 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
TOP  
x
6-2-7 Setting the Shot ID  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
On the SHOT ID page of the USER menu, you can set a  
shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and  
symbols.  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to BARS, DCC  
OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar signal. The  
shot ID comprises ID1 to ID4, and the setting can be  
changed using the SHOT DISP page of the USER menu.  
You can select the SHOT ID to be recorded superimposed  
on the color bars on the SHOT DISP page.  
4
Enter or change the shot ID.  
When you are entering the whole shot ID, go to step  
2.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the x mark to the  
character which you want to change, then press the  
MENU knob.  
Note  
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed  
even if the color bar signal is output.  
The x mark changes to a ? mark and a character  
table appears.  
The x mark moves to the character table.  
To set the shot ID, proceed as follows.  
U11 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
TOP  
x
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
CANCEL/PRST /  
ESCAPE switch  
x
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
MENU knob  
MENU ON/OFF switch  
2 Turn the MENU knob until the x mark moves to  
the character position that you want to select, then  
press the MENU knob.  
Setting the shot ID  
Example: To input “+”  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
U11 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
TOP  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
+
Turn the MENU knob until the SHOT ID page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
x
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 : ssssssssssss  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
5
6
Repeat step 4 for each of the remaining characters.  
When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to  
move the x mark over “END”, then press the MENU  
knob.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the ID  
(one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set, and press the  
MENU knob.  
This ends the input, and returns to the original SHOT  
ID page.  
To insert a space  
Proceed as follows.  
A character table appears, allowing you to select  
characters you want to enter.  
90  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
         
1
2
In step 4 above, move the x mark over “INS”, and  
press the MENU knob.  
ABNORMAL <!> window  
ABNORMAL<!>  
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx  
!GAIN  
!SHUTTER  
WHT PRESET : ON  
:
ON  
ON  
3dB  
OFF  
W:P  
OFF  
OFF  
1B  
:
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ATW RUN  
EXTENDER  
!FILTER  
:
:
ON  
ON  
: OFF  
ON  
ID-1 : CM015  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
OVERRIDE  
:
OFF  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
Move the x mark  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
over “INS”.  
This window allows you to confirm why the ! (warning)  
indicator lights.  
You can use the '!' LED page of the USER menu to set  
whether or not the ! (warning) indicator lights.  
Move the x mark over “RET”, then press the MENU  
knob.  
FUNCTION window  
U11 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 : CM 015  
FUNCTION  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
Space inserted  
FORMAT:  
I
ASSIGN<1> ATW <2> OFF  
<3> OFF <4> OFF  
<T>TURBO  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
ZEBRA :OFF SELECT:  
1
10%  
DET  
DET2 100%  
P.CACHE  
70%  
APT:  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
:
OFF: 0SEC  
- Actual State ---------  
REAR BNC:OFF  
To delete a character  
In step 4 of the procedure for setting the shot ID (see page  
90), move the x mark over “DEL”, and press the MENU  
knob.  
This deletes the character under the x mark in the shot ID  
row.  
This window allows you to confirm the assigned function  
of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, ON/OFF of the Loop Rec  
function, and ON/OFF of the output of the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
To cancel deleting the character, move the x mark over  
“RET”, and press the MENU knob.  
AUDIO STATUS window  
AUDIO STATUS  
To cancel entering or changing shot ID  
16bit DF F.MIC:MONO  
Before executing step 6 of the procedure for setting the  
shot ID (see page 90), move the b mark to “ESC” at the  
top right of the screen, then press the MENU knob or push  
the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch down to ESCAPE.  
This cancels all changes, and returns to the SHOT ID page.  
CH2:FRONT  
CH2:FRONT  
CH3:FRONT  
CH4:FRONT  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
6-2-8 Displaying the Status  
Confirmation Windows  
This window allows you to confirm the following items  
related to audio.  
• Audio bit rate  
• Setting condition of DF/NDF (only for the PDW-510/  
530)  
• Type of front microphone  
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on  
the screen by displaying the following three windows.  
• ABNORMAL <!> window  
• Type of input signal to audio channels 1 to 4  
• Input level of audio channels 1 to 4  
You can use the SET STATUS page of the USER menu to  
set whether or not the status confirmation windows are  
displayed.  
• FUNCTION window  
• AUDIO STATUS window  
To display the status confirmation  
windows  
You can use the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch as the  
STATUS ON/SEL / OFF switch when the MENU ON/  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
91  
   
OFF switch is set to OFF (when the cover of the menu  
operating section is closed, OFF is automatically selected).  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to select whether or not to  
display the selected window, then press the MENU  
knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
By pushing the STATUS ON/SEL  
/ OFF switch up to ON/SEL, the  
confirmation window appears.  
Each time you push this switch up  
to ON/SEL, the window switches.  
After 10 seconds, the window  
disappears automatically.  
5
6
To continue setting other windows, repeat steps 3 and  
4.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To make the window disappear  
promptly after displaying the  
window, push this switch down  
to OFF.  
6-2-9 Confirming the Image of the  
Return Video Signal in the  
Viewfinder  
To disable display of the status  
confirmation windows  
Proceed as follows.  
You can set whether or not the image of the return video  
signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector is displayed in  
the viewfinder, using the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
Proceed as follows.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON while holding  
down the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SET STATUS page  
appears, and press the MENU knob to select the page.  
The TOP menu appears.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“MAINTENANCE”, then press the MENU knob.  
U13 SET STATUS  
STATUS ABNORMAL :  
STATUS FUNCTION :  
STATUS AUDIO  
ON  
ON  
ON  
:
If this is the first time the MAINTENANCE menu has  
been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu appears. If the menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “GENLOCK”, then press  
the MENU knob to display the GENLOCK page.  
You can set the following items on the SET STATUS  
page.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the GENLOCK page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
Item  
ABNORMAL  
Description  
Selects whether or not the ABNORMAL  
window is displayed (ON or OFF).  
FUNCTION  
Selects whether or not the FUNCTION  
window is displayed (ON or OFF).  
STATUS AUDIO Selects whether or not the STATUS  
AUDIO window is displayed (ON or  
OFF).  
92  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
     
However, the image is switched while you are holding  
down the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch to which the return video  
function is assigned, even if no signal is input to the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
M15 MAINTENANCE  
TOP  
GENLOCK  
RETURN VIDEO  
:
:
ON  
OFF  
GL H PHASE  
GL SC PHASE  
:
:
0
0
GL SC 0/180 SEL :  
180  
4
Carry out setting operations as follows.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“GENLOCK”, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “GENLOCK” changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
GENLOCK setting changes to a ? mark.  
2 Turn the MENU knob until ”OFF” appears, then  
press the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of “GENLOCK” changes  
to a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
GENLOCK setting changes to a z mark, and the  
setting is executed.  
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“RETURN VIDEO”, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark changes to a z mark and the z mark  
changes to a ? mark.  
4 Turn the MENU knob until “ON” appears, then  
press the MENU knob.  
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark  
changes to a z mark, and the setting is executed.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To see the image of the return video signal  
on the viewfinder screen  
Hold down the RET switch on the lens. The image of the  
return video signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector  
is displayed on the viewfinder screen while you are  
holding down the RET switch.  
When the return video function is assigned to the ASSIGN  
1/3/4 switch, you can see the image of the return video  
signal on the viewfinder screen while you are holding  
down the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch even if the RETURN  
VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
Note  
When no signal is input to the GENLOCK IN connector,  
the image is not changed even if you hold down the RET  
switch on the lens.  
6-2 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen  
93  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
6-3 Adjustments and  
Settings from Menus  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
The camcorder provides menus for adjustments and  
settings.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
6-3-1 Setting Gain Values for the  
GAIN Selector Positions  
Before using the camcorder, use the GAIN SW page of the  
USER menu to set the gains corresponding to the L, M,  
and H positions of the GAIN selector, which switches the  
gain of the video amplifier.  
Any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36, 42 or 48 dB  
can be set for each of the L, M, and H positions, in any  
sequence.  
To set the gain values, proceed as follows.  
For TURBO, any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, 36,  
42 or 48 dB can be selected.  
To change the gain corresponding to another switch  
position, return to step 3.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Turn the MENU knob until the GAIN SW page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
The menu display disappears, and the current status of  
the camcorder is shown along the top and bottom of  
the screen.  
U08 GAIN SW  
TOP  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
:
:
:
:
0db  
9db  
18db  
42db  
TURBO SW IND.  
:
OFF  
6-3-2 Selecting the Output Signals  
The OUTPUT SEL page of the USER menu allows you to  
set whether or not the video signal is output from the  
VIDEO OUT connector. You can also select the type of  
video signals from the VIDEO OUT connector (when the  
CBK-SD01 (not supplied) is installed).  
You can set the following items on the GAIN SW  
page.  
To select the output signal, proceed as follows.  
Item  
GAIN LOW  
Description  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the L position of the GAIN selector.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
GAIN MID  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the M position of the GAIN selector.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
GAIN HIGH  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
the H position of the GAIN selector.  
Turn the MENU knob until the OUTPUT page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND  
Sets the gain value corresponding to  
TURBO GAIN button selection.  
U01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
OFF: When you operate the GAIN  
selector after pressing the TURBO  
GAIN button once, the video gain is  
changed according to the GAIN  
selector operation.  
LCD BRIGHT <L>  
LCD BRIGHT <H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
iLINK SBP2 MODE: DSABL  
REAR BNC OUT SEL: OFF  
ON: When the video gain is boosted to  
the video gain to the value preset by  
pressing the TURBO GAIN button  
once, the video gain is not changed  
even if you operate the GAIN selector,  
until you press the TURBO GAIN  
button once more.  
You can set the following items on the OUTPUT SEL  
page.  
94  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
           
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to WHITE, and press the  
MENU knob to display the WHITE page.  
Item  
Description  
LCD BRIGHT <L> Adjusts the LCD brightness when the  
LCD switch is in the L position.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the WHITE page appears, and press the MENU  
knob to select the page.  
LCD BRIGHT <H> Adjusts the LCD brightness when the  
LCD switch is in the H position.  
LCD COLOR  
Adjusts the color saturation of the LCD.  
i.LINK SBP2  
MODE  
Selects whether or not to use the  
i.LINK connector SBP2 interface.  
P02 WHITE  
COLOR TEMP  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
D5600K  
COLOR TEMP  
COLOR FINE  
R GAIN  
B GAIN  
D5600K  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<A>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
<B>:  
:
3200  
0
0
0
REAR BNC OUT  
SEL  
Selects the type of the video signal to  
be output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
OFF  
3200  
0
0
0
OFF  
SDI : Outputs the SDI signal. When  
SDI is selected, connect the  
VIDEO OUT connector to the SDI  
IN connector of the video monitor.  
VBS: Outputs the analog composite  
video signal. When VBS is  
selected, connector the VIDEO  
OUT connector to the VIDEO IN  
connector of the video monitor.  
This setting allows you to save the  
power.  
Item  
Description  
COLOR TEMP  
<A>  
Sets the color temperature for the  
desired value. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because error  
tends to be bigger for adjustment of  
high color temperature.  
3
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “REAR  
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely when  
the color temperature adjustment  
through COLOR TEMP is not  
BNC OUT SEL”, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “REAR BNC OUT SEL”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K  
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting,  
and press the MENU knob.  
Sets the color temperature to  
approximately 5600 K.  
The above table shows the adjustment of the white  
balance of channel A.  
Items followed by “<B>” are used to adjust the white  
balance of channel B.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
6-3-3 Setting the Color Temperature  
Manually  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by  
setting the color temperature.  
Proceed as follows.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
1
2
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
To set other items, go back to step 3.  
The TOP menu appears.  
6
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“PAINT”, and press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the PAINT menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu  
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
95  
   
Item  
Description  
6-3-4 Specifying an Offset for the  
Auto White Balance Setting  
WARM-COOL <B> Sets the offset for the white balance of  
channel B, using the color  
temperature. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because  
error tends to be bigger for adjustment  
of high color temperature.  
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance,  
you can make the picture warmer or colder.  
The OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION menu  
allows you to do this setting.  
COLOR FINE <B> Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <B> is  
not satisfactory.  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
4
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the position  
corresponding to the desired channel (A or B).  
The TOP menu appears.  
Note  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“OPERATION”, and press the MENU knob.  
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B when  
you operate the camcorder, the adjustment value will  
not be reflected in the output signal.  
If this is the first time the OPERATION menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu  
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “OFFSET WHITE”, and  
press the MENU knob to display the OFFSET WHITE  
page.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting, and press  
the MENU knob.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the OFFSET WHITE page appears, and press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
P17 OFFSET WHT  
TOP  
OFFSET WHITE <A>:  
WARM COOL  
COLOR FINE  
OFF  
3200  
0
<A>:  
<A>:  
To set other items, go back to step 3.  
To set the other white balance channel, go back to step  
2.  
OFFSET WHITE <B>:  
WARM COOL <B>:  
COLOR FINE <B>:  
OFF  
3200  
0
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
The WHITE page contains the following items.  
Item  
OFFSET WHITE  
<A>  
Description  
6-3-5 Assigning Functions to  
ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 Switches  
Turns the setting of the offset for  
channel A ON or OFF. ON: Adds the  
offset adjusted on this page to the  
white balance.  
You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN  
1/2/3/4 switches and the TURBO GAIN button.  
Proceed as follows.  
WARM-COOL <A> Sets the offset for the white balance of  
channel A, using the color  
temperature. Adjust the value while  
looking at the real image because  
error tends to be bigger for adjustment  
of high color temperature.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely if the  
adjustment by WARM-COOL <A> is  
not satisfactry.  
Turn the MENU knob until the FUNCTION 1 page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select to page.  
OFFSET WHITE  
<B>  
Turns the setting of the offset for  
channel B ON or OFF. ON: Adds the  
offset adjusted on this page to the  
white balance.  
96  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
         
Function  
Description  
U03 FUNCTION1  
TOP  
ATW  
Assigns the ON/OFF function of auto-  
tracing white balance.  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
TURBO SW  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
OFF  
RETURN VIDEO Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
the image of the return video signal on  
OFF  
TURBO  
DF  
OFF  
DF/NDF  
CACHE/INTVAL  
2)  
the viewfinder to the switch.  
LENS RET  
Assigns the same function as that of the  
RET switch on the lens to the switch.  
REC SWITCH  
Assigns the VTR S/S (start/stop) function  
to the switch.  
The FUNCTION 1 page contains the following items.  
TURBO  
SWITCH  
Assigns the turbo gain function to the  
switch.  
Item  
Description  
ASSIGN SW 1  
ASSIGN SW 2  
ASSIGN SW 3  
ASSIGN SW 4  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1  
(push-type) switch.  
ZEBRA  
Assigns the zebra pattern display  
function to the switch.  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2  
(slide-type) switch.  
FREEZE MIX  
Outputs the freeze image and camera  
input alternately, to allow frame alignment  
(automatic switching).  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3  
(push-type) switch.  
FREEZE MIX  
(Manual)  
Outputs the freeze image and camera  
input alternately, to allow frame alignment  
(manual switching).  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4  
(push-type) switch.  
D5600  
Applies an electrical 5600 K filter.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
corresponding to the switch to which you want to  
assign the function, and press the MENU knob.  
ZOOM TELE/  
When using a serial lens, assign the  
ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3, and  
the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4.  
3)  
WIDE  
The corresponding ASSIGN SW SEL window  
appears.  
ZOOM WIDE/  
TELE  
When using a serial lens, assign the  
ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3, and  
the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4.  
3)  
ASSIGN <1/3/4> SEL window  
4)  
Assigns the items assigned in the  
ASSIGN SEL menu.  
UA01 to UA10  
ASSIGN SW1 SEL ESC  
OFF  
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF  
TEST OUT CHARACTER  
MARKER  
RE-TAKE  
ATW  
RETURN VIDEO  
LENS RET  
REC SWITCH  
TURBO SWITCH  
1) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER page of  
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch allows you to display or not to  
display all markers.  
2) Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to “OFF” on the GENLOCK page  
of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to display the  
image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.  
3) Only the Assign 3SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear.  
4) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.  
ASSIGN <2> SEL window  
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 2 (slide-  
type) switch  
ASSIGN SW2 SEL ESC  
OFF  
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF  
TEST OUT CHARACTER  
MARKER  
Function  
Content  
ZEBRA  
FREEZE MIX  
FREEZE MIX(Manual)  
D5600  
EXT REC CONTROL  
OFF  
Disables the switch.  
TEST OUT  
CHARACTER  
Assigns the function to switch whether or  
not the characters are mixed to the video  
signal to be output from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
Functions to be assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4  
(push-type) switch  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
all markers.  
1)  
ZEBRA  
D5600  
Assigns the zebra pattern display  
function to the switch.  
Function  
OFF  
Description  
Disables the switch.  
Applies an electrical 5600 K filter.  
TEST OUT  
CHARACTER  
Assigns the function to switch whether or  
not text is superimposed on the video  
signal to be output from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
EXT REC  
CONTROL  
Selects whether or not recording control  
of external devices connected through  
the i.LINK connector or the CCZ  
connector (26-pin) of a CA-702 is  
possible.  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display  
1)  
all markers.  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
97  
Function  
Content  
6-3-6 Setting the Date/Time of the  
Internal Clock  
REC VIDEO  
SOURCE  
Selects which signals you will record  
pictures being shot by the camcorder or  
video signals from external equipment  
connected to GENLOCK IN connector.  
2)  
You can set or change the date and time of the internal  
clock. The date and time set are reflected in the time code.  
Proceed as follows.  
3)  
Assigns the items assigned in the  
ASSIGN SEL menu.  
UA01 to UA10  
1) Even when the MARKER item is set to “OFF” on the MARKER page of  
the USER menu, the ASSIGN 2 switch allows you to display or not to  
display all markers.  
1
Holding down the MENU knob, move the MENU ON/  
OFF switch from OFF to ON.  
2) When the CBK-SC01 is not installed, this item does not appears since this  
function is not effective.  
The TOP menu appears.  
3) This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“DIAGNOSIS”, and press the MENU knob.  
Note  
For functions that are assigned to the ASSIGN 2  
switch, you cannot change those settings using other  
menus. The function assigned to ASSIGN 2 switch  
takes precedence over the menu setting.  
If this is the first time the DIAGNOSIS menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page appears. If the menu  
has been used before, the last accessed page appears.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, turn the MENU  
knob to move the b mark to “TIME/DATE”, and press  
the MENU knob to display the TIME/DATE page.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark changes to a z mark, and the z mark by  
the setting changes to a ? mark.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the TIME/DATE page appears, then press the  
MENU knob to select the page.  
Turn the MENU knob to switch to the desired setting,  
and press the MENU knob.  
04 TIME/DATE  
ADJUST  
:
EXEC  
The z mark changes to back a b mark, and the ? mark  
by the setting changes back to a z mark, confirming  
the setting.  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
6
To continue with other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.  
To return to the FUNCTION 1 page  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “ESC” at the  
right top of the window and press the MENU knob.  
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
down to the ESCAPE side.  
The b mark is placed at “ADJUST”.  
4
Press the MENU knob.  
The TIME ADJUST setting window appears.  
To end the menu operation  
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or close the cover  
of the menu operating section.  
TIME ADJUST ESC  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
Operation of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 when UA01 to  
UA10 are assigned  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
00  
07  
31  
When an on/off switchable function (or menu item) is  
assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1/2/3/4 switches, each time  
the switch is pressed toggles the function on or off.  
When another type of menu item is assigned, pressing the  
switch displays the item and its setting value on the screen.  
You can then change the setting by pressing and turning  
the MENU knob.  
OK  
This window contains the following items.  
Item  
HOUR  
Description  
The viewfinder display disappears approximately three  
seconds after the last operation.  
Sets the hour value.  
Sets the minutes value.  
Sets the seconds value.  
Sets the year.  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
98  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
   
Item  
Description  
U15 LENS FILE  
LENS FILE SELECT:  
F.ID :  
TOP  
1
MONTH  
DAY  
Sets the month.  
Sets the day.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the item  
you want to set, and press MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to LENS  
FILE SELECT, and press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired value, and  
press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
The z mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a b mark and the ? mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a z mark.  
Turn the MENU knob until the lens file No. in use  
appears, then press the MENU knob.  
7
8
To continue the remaining settings, repeat steps 5 and  
6.  
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the  
left of the lens No. changes to a z mark.  
When you finish settings, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “OK”, then press the MENU knob.  
If you do not want to use a lens file  
Select NO OFFSET.  
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in  
steps 5 to 7. The TIME/DATE page of the  
DIAGNOSIS menu appears again. The time set on the  
TIME ADJUST setting window is displayed.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To cancel the setting  
Before executing step 8, move the b mark to “ESC” at the  
top right of the window and press the MENU knob.  
Alternatively, push the CANCEL/PRST / ESCAPE switch  
down to the ESCAPE side.  
6-3-8 Selecting the Aspect Ratio  
The FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu allows you  
to select the aspect ratio of the video output signal.  
All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE  
page of the DIAGNOSIS menu appears.  
Note  
When the CA-701/702/702P camera adaptor is used with  
the camcorder, this function is not available. To select the  
aspect ratio, disconnect the CA-701/702/702P camera  
adaptor from the camcorder or turn off the power of the  
CA-701/702/702P camera adaptor.  
6-3-7 Selecting the Lens File  
Note  
When using a serial lens, lens file selection is not possible.  
1
2
Follow the procedure of steps 1 to 3 described in  
Balance Setting” on page 96 to display the FORMAT  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
The LENS FILE page of the USER menu allows you to  
change the lens file according to the lens in use.  
Proceed as follows.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
20 FORMAT  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
I
SCAN MODE  
:
:
Turn the MENU knob until the LENS FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
UC/J SELECT  
UC  
The LENS FILE page shows the name and the f-stop  
(iris setting) of the lens currently selected.  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “16:9/4:3  
SELECT”, and press MENU knob.  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
99  
           
The b mark on the left of the selected item changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
6-3-9 Setting the CCD Scan Mode  
Since the camcorder has CCDs that use an “all pixels read-  
out method,” a progressive scan mode is also available in  
addition to the conventional interlace scan mode.  
You can select either of the following modes using the  
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.  
• I (interlace scan) mode  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired aspect  
ratio, and press the MENU knob.  
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the  
left of the aspect ratio changes to a z mark.  
• PsF (progressive scan) mode  
Installing the CBK-FC01 allows you to select the 24P  
mode.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Each mode is described below using timing charts.  
To display the aspect ratio of 16:9/4:3 on the  
viewfinder screen  
I (interlace scan) mode  
By setting the “DISP 16:9/4:3 ID” item on the VF DISP 2  
page of the USER menu to “ON”, “16:9” or “4:3” appears  
on the viewfinder screen when the aspect ratio of 16:9 is  
selected.  
CCD output  
Video output signal  
O: Odd  
E: Even  
To display “16:9” in color bars  
By setting the “SHOT 16:9 ID” on the SHOT DISP page  
of the USER menu to ON, you can record a “16:9” mode  
indicator superimposed on the color bars.  
Interlace scan mode timing chart  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an  
even scanning line are output from the CCD alternately.  
Thus, the timing of the odd-field video signal and even-  
field video signal are different.  
PsF (progressive scan) mode  
CCD output  
Video output signal  
Color bars (SMPTE type)  
O: Odd  
E: Even  
Progressive scan mode timing chart  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an  
even scanning line are output from the CCD at the same  
time. Then they are sent to the memory and separated into  
odd-field and even-field scanning lines. Thus the timing of  
an odd-field video signal and an even-field video signal are  
the same.  
Color bars (EBU type)  
16:9 mode indicator on the color bar display  
100  
6-3 Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
       
Setting the CCD scan mode to the  
progressive scan mode  
The scan mode of the camcorder has been set to the  
interlace scan mode at the factory. The FORMAT page of  
the OPERATION menu allows you to change the CCD  
scan mode to the progressive scan mode.  
6-4 Resetting USER  
Menu Settings to the  
Standard Settings  
1
Follow the procedures given in steps 1 to 3 described  
Balance Setting” on page 96, to display the FORMAT  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
You can return all settings in the USER menu to the  
standard settings. It is also possible to change the standard  
settings from their factory default values.  
For details on how to change the factory settings, refer to  
the Maintenance Manual.  
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCAN  
MODE”, and press the MENU knob.  
To reset all settings to the standard settings, proceed as  
follows.  
The b mark on the left of “SCAN MODE” changes to  
a z mark and the z mark on the left of the setting  
changes to a ? mark.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
19 FORMAT  
The last accessed menu appears on the screen.  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
I
SCAN MODE  
:?  
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, and press the MENU knob.  
UC/J SELECT  
:
UC  
U16 USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
3
Turn the MENU knob to display “PsF”, and press the  
MENU knob.  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
The z mark changes to a b mark and the ? mark on the  
left of the SCAN MODE changes to a z mark.  
USER FILE page  
19 FORMAT  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
16:9  
PsF  
UC  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
SCAN MODE  
:
:
PRESET”, and press the MENU knob.  
UC/J SELECT  
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.  
U16 USER FILE  
LOAD OK?  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
YES NO  
: EXEC  
4
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
:
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to”YES”,  
and press the MENU knob.  
The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset  
to the standard settings.  
6-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings  
101  
         
102  
6-4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings  
Saving and Loading User  
Setting Data  
7
Chapter  
Inserting the “Memory Stick”  
Proceed as follows.  
7-1 Saving and Loading  
User Files to and  
from a “Memory  
Stick”  
1
Open the cover of the menu operating section.  
The “Memory Stick” slot is now visible.  
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” drive,  
which enables you to save user files, scene files, lens files,  
reference files and ALLfiles. You can load these files  
from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a  
particular setting configuration.  
When a menu page is displayed, you can set up the  
camcorder so that inserting a “Memory Stick”  
automatically jumps to the appropriate file-related menu  
page.  
2
Hold the “Memory Stick” with the notch facing  
downward and the arrow facing away from you, and  
insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick”  
slot until it clicks into place. Then close the cover.  
For details about scene files, see 7-2 “Saving and Loading  
For details about lens files, reference files and “ALL”  
files, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate  
112.  
“Memory Sticks” usable with this  
camcorder  
“Memory Stick”  
With this camcorder, you can use “Memory Sticks” whose  
capacity does not exceed 128 MB.  
Inserting the “Memory Stick”  
Note  
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some  
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be  
turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory  
Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and  
arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the  
“Memory Stick”, and then try inserting it again.  
7-1-1 Handling the “Memory Stick”  
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from  
the camcorder with the power turned on or off.  
7-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”  
103  
                 
• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick”, keep it  
in its original case to ensure protection of important data.  
• When carrying the camcorder with the “Memory Stick”  
inserted, close the cover of the menu operating section.  
• Avoid removing the “Memory Stick” from the insertion  
slot while the access indicator is lit.  
Removing the “Memory Stick”  
Check that the access indicator is not lit, then gently press  
in the “Memory Stick” and release. It pops out, and you  
can withdraw it from the slot.  
• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.  
For formatting the “Memory Stick”, see the description  
of the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu on  
For details of the "Memory Stick", see page 139.  
Check that the access  
indicator is not lit  
7-1-2 Saving User Menu Data to the  
“Memory Stick”  
Gently press in  
Removing the “Memory Stick”  
You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder  
as user files in the “Memory Stick”.  
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory Stick”.  
Insert the “Memory Stick”, then proceed as follows.  
Note  
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access  
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the “Memory  
Stick”.  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
Protecting saved data  
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, use  
the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick”.  
Slide the switch right to the write protect position. It is now  
impossible to write or delete data on the “Memory Stick”.  
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
U15 USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET  
:
EXEC  
LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick”  
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 3.  
Notes on using and storing the “Memory  
Stick”  
• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or  
contacting it with a metal object.  
For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file  
• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick”, use only  
the label supplied for the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to  
external shock.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to USER  
FILE SAVE, and press the MENU knob.  
The P00 USER SAVE page appears.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.  
• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick”.  
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location  
subject to:  
- extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a  
car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place  
near a heater.  
?P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
- direct sunlight  
- high humidity  
- excessive dust  
104  
7-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”  
   
When a ? appears on the left of “P00” at the top left of  
the page, you can change the page. Up to 20 pages,  
from P00 to P19, can be used to save user files in the  
“Memory Stick”. Each page can hold up to 5 files.  
7
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file number appears, and press the MENU  
knob.  
The menu disappears from the viewfinder screen, and  
the display indicating the current status of the  
camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the  
screen.  
P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
USER menu settings to be saved in the “Memory  
Stick”  
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are  
saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file. However, you  
can select the items which are not to be saved in the  
“Memory Stick”.  
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.  
If data cannot be saved  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the save operation, then the data was not saved.  
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears, and  
the access indicator lights.  
Data save error messages  
P00 USER SAVE  
SAVE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
When a file number is  
shown as "NEW FILE",  
this means that the file  
is empty. When data is  
stored in a file number,  
the file name appears.  
YES NO  
:
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
NO MEMORY  
No “Memory  
Insert or reinsert the  
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick”.  
MEMORY STICK The LOCK  
Set the LOCK switch  
to the write enable  
position.  
LOCKED  
switch on the  
“Memory Stick”  
is set to the write  
protect position.  
6
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO”.  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or  
Check the circuitry, or  
replace the “Memory  
Stick” .  
ERROR  
“Memory Stick”  
fault.  
(flashing)  
When the saving is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes  
off.  
Setting the file ID  
Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, it is useful to set  
a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.  
When data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, the file ID is  
saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.  
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the message  
“NO MEMORY STICK” will appear. Insert a  
“Memory Stick”.  
Note  
If you select a file number where data has already  
been saved  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears. In this case, the b mark appears on the left of  
“NO”, which is flashing.  
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
To set the file ID, proceed as follows.  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press  
the MENU knob.  
1
On the USER FILE page, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “F. ID”.  
You can select the information displayed on each  
USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.  
7-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”  
105  
   
2
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark until the  
desired type of the display contents (see the following  
table) appears, then press the MENU knob.  
U16 USER FILE  
TOP  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET  
:
EXEC  
P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
:
F.ID  
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
2
Press the MENU knob.  
A character table appears, allowing you to select  
characters you want to enter.  
Display type Description  
U16 USER FILE  
TOP  
ALL  
File ID (10 characters) and date ((month/  
day/year) for PDW-510/530 and (day/month/  
year) for PDW-510P/530P)  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID :?  
x
F.ID  
File ID (16 characters)  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
DATE  
Saved date (year/month/day/hours/minutes/  
seconds)  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
MODEL  
Information on the model  
3
4
Follow the procedure of steps 4 and 5 described in 6-  
ID.  
7-1-3 Loading saved data from a  
“Memory Stick”  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU  
knob to move the x mark to “END”, then press the  
MENU knob.  
Note  
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the  
data saved in the camcorder.  
The entered file ID is now displayed.  
Proceed as follows.  
13 USER FILE  
TOP  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
1
2
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
The last accessed menu page appears on the screen.  
:
Turn the MENU knob until the USER FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob. Alternatively,  
select “USER FILE” on the CONTENTS page.  
File ID set in step 3  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “USER  
FILE LOAD”, and press the MENU knob.  
Carry out the procedure from step 3 in 7-1-2 “Saving  
User Menu Data to the “Memory Stick”” on page 104.  
The P00 USER LOAD page appears.  
The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the  
data.  
?P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
Selecting the display contents  
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on  
the USER SAVE page and USER LOAD page.  
Proceed as follows.  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
1
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“DISPLAY MODE”, and press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file number appears, then press the MENU  
knob.  
106  
7-1 Saving and Loading User Files to and from a “Memory Stick”  
     
P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
7-2 Saving and Loading  
Scene Files  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
You can save various settings for shooting a particular  
scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can  
quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.  
You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder  
memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick”.  
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the  
camcorder memory.  
5
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number to be loaded, and press the MENU  
knob.  
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears and  
the access indicator lights.  
Data that can be saved in a scene file  
You can save the following data in a scene file:  
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu  
P00 USER LOAD  
LOAD OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
For details of the PAINT menu, refer to the Maintenance  
Manual.  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and  
ECS mode  
• The white balance data included in a scene file depends  
on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the  
REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.  
6
7
To carry out the load, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO”.  
When the load is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes  
off.  
7-2-1 Saving a Scene File  
The USER FILE page appears again.  
Proceed as follows to save a scene file in the camcorder  
memory or the “Memory Stick”.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Note  
To save a scene file in the “Memory Stick”, insert the  
“Memory Stick” before starting the operation.  
If data cannot be loaded  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
Data load error messages  
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Alternatively, select “SCENE FILE” on the  
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
NO MEMORY  
No “Memory  
Insert or reinsert the  
STICK (flashing) Stick” is inserted. “Memory Stick”.  
CONTENTS page to display the SCENE FILE page.  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or  
Recheck, and  
consult your Sony  
representative.  
ERROR  
“Memory Stick”  
fault.  
04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
(flashing)  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
FILE ERROR  
(flashing)  
The “Memory  
Stick” contains  
data that cannot  
be loaded into this  
camcorder.  
Do not try to load  
data saved from  
another camcorder.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
7-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files  
107  
         
If you want to set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 3.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
For details on setting the file ID, see “Setting the file  
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE  
STORE”, and press the MENU knob.  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
STANDARD  
P01 SCENE STORE  
STORE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the SCENE  
STORE page appears.  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
?P00 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
3 To carry out the storing, move the b mark to  
“YES” and press the MENU knob.  
:
MEM-01:STANDARD  
MEM-02:STANDARD  
MEM-03:STANDARD  
MEM-04:STANDARD  
MEM-05:STANDARD  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b  
mark pointing to “NO”.  
You can select the contents of the user file to be  
displayed on the page.  
4
Select the desired file number.  
When no “Memory Stick” has been inserted  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page  
appears again.  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To return to the SCENE FILE page  
After the message “COMPLETE” is displayed, move  
the b mark to “ESC” at the top right of the page by  
turning the MENU knob, then press the MENU knob.  
When you select a file number where data has  
already been saved  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears. In this case, the b mark is placed on the left  
of “NO”.  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob.  
• To overwrite, move the b mark to “YES” and press  
the MENU knob.  
White balance setting data to be saved in  
the scene file  
The white balance setting data to be saved in the scene file  
depends on the setting of the SCENE WHITE DATA item  
on the REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.  
When a “Memory Stick” has been inserted  
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save  
scene files in the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold  
up to 5 files.  
F05 REFERENCE  
REFERENCE STORE :  
REFERENCE CLEAR :  
EXEC  
EXEC  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID: sssssssssssssssss  
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
contains the desired file number appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF  
108  
7-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files  
   
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON  
5
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
The white balance setting data selected when you save the  
scene file is saved. For example, when the WHITE BAL  
switch is set to A, the adjusted values in memory A are  
saved in the scene file, and when the WHITE BAL switch  
is set to PRST, the preset value is saved.  
Note  
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 2, those  
files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder  
memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced.  
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to OFF  
White balance setting data is not stored in the scene file.  
Setting the file ID  
Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a  
file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with  
the data.  
Saving scene files from the camcorder  
memory to the “Memory Stick”  
You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the  
“Memory Stick” in a single operation.  
Proceed as follows.  
To set the file ID, proceed as follows.  
1
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “F. ID”.  
1
2
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (see page 107)  
turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “SCENE  
STORE” on the SCENE FILE page, then press the  
MENU knob.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
One of the SCENE STORE pages appears.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE  
STORE page appears, then press the MENU knob.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID:  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
2
Press the MENU knob.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
FEB/05/02  
FEB/06/02  
A character table appears, allowing you to select  
characters you want to enter.  
FEB/08/02  
FEB/08/02  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
U16 USER FILE  
TOP  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
SAVE B MEM1-5”, and press the MENU knob.  
s
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
F.ID:  
x
P01 SCENE STORE  
SAVE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
3
4
Carry out the operations for steps 4 and 5 described in  
ID.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
Note  
Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the  
“Memory Stick” or the camcorder memory.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
To carry out the save, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO”.  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU  
knob to move the x mark to “END”, then press the  
MENU knob.  
When the save is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears.  
The SCENE FILE page appears again.  
7-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files  
109  
     
The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting  
this scene file.  
04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory Stick”  
Proceed as follows.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
1 On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to  
move the b mark to “SCENE RECALL”, and press  
the MENU knob.  
Carry out the procedure from step 3 in 7-2-1 “Saving  
The P00 SCENE RECALL page appears.  
?P00 SCENE RECALL  
ESC  
The set file ID is saved together with the data.  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
F.ID  
MEM<1>:STANDARD  
MEM<2>:STANDARD  
MEM<3>:STANDARD  
MEM<4>:STANDARD  
MEM<5>:NO FILE  
Selecting the display contents  
You can select the items of file information to be displayed  
on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE  
RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or  
loading data from a “Memory Stick”.  
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
contains the desired file number appears, then press  
the MENU knob.  
7-2-2 Loading Scene Files  
3 Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
Proceed as follows.  
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO”  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
appears.  
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE FILE page  
appears, then press the MENU knob to select the page.  
Alternatively, on the CONTENTS page select  
“SCENE FILE”, and press the MENU knob to display  
the SCENE FILE page.  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
3
Load the scene file.  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to the  
desired file number, and press the MENU knob.  
The s which is displayed on the left of the file number  
changes to x.  
4
5
To carry out the recall, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO”.  
The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene  
file.  
When the loading is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up  
according to the loaded scene file.  
04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
x
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
If no file is present with a particular file number, this  
is shown as “NO FILE”.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
To cancel the selected scene file  
Move the b mark to x, and press the MENU knob. x  
changes to s.  
110  
7-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files  
       
Loading scene files from a “Memory Stick”  
into the camcorder memory  
You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory  
Stick” into the camcorder memory in a single operation.  
7-2-3 Resetting the Settings of the  
Camcorder to the Standard  
Settings Saved in the  
Reference File  
1
After displaying the SCENE FILE page (see page  
109), turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to  
“SCENE RECALL”, and press the MENU knob.  
You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings  
saved in the reference file (standard settings).  
For details about the items in the reference file, refer to the  
Maintenance Manual.  
A SCENE RECALL page appears.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL  
page which contains the desired scene files appears,  
then press the MENU knob.  
On the SCENE FILE page, turn the MENU knob to move  
the b mark to “STANDARD”, and press the MENU knob.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “5FILE  
LOAD b MEM 1-5”, and press the MENU knob.  
s
s
s
s
s
x
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
The message “RECALL OK? YES bNO” appears.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
The s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x.  
When x changes to s, the settings of the camcorder are  
reset to the settings saved in the reference file.  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
If you press the MENU knob again while x is displayed,  
the operation is canceled and the camcorder returns to the  
settings before STANDARD was selected.  
4
5
To carry out the recall, move the b mark to “YES” and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving the b mark  
pointing to “NO”.  
When loading is complete, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes  
off.  
To end the menu operation, set the MENU ON/OFF  
switch to OFF or close the cover of the menu operating  
section.  
Notes  
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”  
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.  
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory  
when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the P00  
SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in  
the camcorder memory.  
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO  
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is  
unaffected. In the example shown in step 3, MEM(3) is  
not overwritten.  
7-2 Saving and Loading Scene Files  
111  
   
Setting  
REFER  
USER 1  
Description  
7-3 Jumping to a File-  
Related Menu Page  
When Inserting a  
Jumps to the REFERENCE page.  
Jumps to the USER 1 page.  
5
Press the MENU knob to confirm the selection.  
The z mark on the left of “MS IN > JUMP TO”  
changes to on b mark and the ? mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a z mark.  
“Memory Stick”  
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files, scene  
files, lens files, reference files and “ALL” files. The  
camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting so  
that when a “Memory Stick” holding these files is inserted  
while in menu operating mode, a menu page relating to the  
desired file is automatically displayed on the screen. Thus  
you can proceed to file operation quickly. This is very  
convenient especially when you manage data files using  
“Memory Stick”s.  
Notes  
In the following cases, jumping to the target page is  
impossible.  
• When the power is turned on after you insert a “Memory  
Stick”.  
• When OFF is selected for the MS IN > JUMP TO item.  
• When any of the following menu pages is already  
displayed.  
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the  
FILE menu  
To make this setting, proceed as follows.  
- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS  
FILE, REFERENCE FILE or ROM VERSION page  
1
2
In the TOP menu, select the FILE menu.  
Turn the MENU knob until the MEMORY STICK  
page of the FILE menu appears, then press the MENU  
knob to select the page. Alternatively, on the  
CONTENTS page select MEMORY STICK to display  
the MEMORY STICK page.  
09 MEMORY STICK  
TOP  
FORMAT  
MS IN > JUMP TO :  
:
EXEC  
OFF  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move the b mark to “MS IN  
> JUMP TO”, and press the MENU knob.  
The b mark on the left of “MS IN > JUMP TO”  
changes to a z mark and the z mark on the left of the  
setting changes to a ? mark.  
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting  
(target FILE menu page).  
Setting  
OFF  
Description  
Disables this function.  
USER  
ALL  
Jumps to the USER FILE page.  
Jumps to the ALL FILE page.  
Jumps to the SCENE FILE page.  
Jumps to the LENS FILE 1 page.  
SCENE  
LENS  
112  
7-3 Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”  
     
Setting Up the  
Camcorder  
8
Chapter  
Attaching the battery pack  
8-1 Power Supply  
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the  
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery  
pack with the matching line on the camcorder.  
The following power supplies can be used with the  
camcorder.  
• BP-IL75/GL95 Lithium-ion Battery Pack  
Back of camcorder  
• BP-M100 Nickel Metal Hydride Rechargeable Battery  
Pack  
• AC power using the AC-550/550CE or AC-DN2B AC  
adaptor  
BP-IL75/GL95/  
M100  
Align these  
lines.  
8-1-1 Using a Battery Pack  
When a BP-IL75 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will  
operate continuously for about 90 minutes. Before use,  
charge the battery pack with a BC-M150 Battery Charger.  
It takes about 140 minutes to charge one BP-IL75.  
2
Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow  
points at the matching line on the camcorder.  
For details, refer to the battery charger operation manual.  
When a BP-M100 Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will  
operate for about 120 minutes. Before use, charge the  
battery pack with a BC-M50 Battery Charger. It takes  
about 240 minutes to charge one BP-M100.  
For details, refer to the battery charger operation manual.  
“LOCK”  
arrow  
Note on using the battery pack  
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.  
Matching line on  
the camcorder  
8-1 Power Supply  
113  
                       
Detaching the battery pack  
8-1-3 Using an AC Adaptor  
Using the AC-550/550CE AC adaptor  
Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through  
the AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor as shown in the following  
figure, and turn the POWER switch of the AC-550/550CE  
on.  
ACCESS  
indicator  
Holding the  
button in, pull  
the battery  
pack up.  
to an AC power source  
Power switch on  
AC Adaptor  
AC-550/  
550CE  
DC OUT  
DC IN  
Detaching the battery pack  
DC output cable (supplied with  
the AC-550/550CE)  
Note  
During recording or playback (while the ACCESS  
indicator is lit), be careful never to remove the battery  
pack.  
Using an AC Adaptor  
Using the AC-DN2B AC adaptor  
Mount the AC-DN2B on the camcorder in the same way as  
a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. The  
AC-DN2B can supply up to 150 W of power.  
8-1-2 Avoiding Breaks in Operation  
Due to an exhausted Battery  
When the battery pack is becoming exhausted, you can  
perform battery replacement without causing a break to the  
camcorder operation by using an AC adaptor.  
To do this, proceed as follows.  
1
Connect an AC-550/AC-550CE Adaptor to an AC  
power source, then connect it to the DC IN connector  
of the camcorder.  
to an AC power  
source  
Connecting to an AC power source using the AC-DN2B AC Adaptor  
For details, see the next section.  
The power source switches automatically from the  
battery pack to the AC adaptor connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
8-1-4 Using the Anton Bauer  
Ultralight System  
By fitting the camcorder with the Anton Bauer Ultralight  
system, and setting the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can  
switch the light on and off automatically as you start and  
stop REC operation. This system operates with lights  
powered by 12 V, with a maximum power consumption of  
50 W.  
Note  
There may be some noise on the video signal at the  
time of power source switching.  
2
3
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.  
To switch back the power source from the AC adaptor  
to the battery, disconnect the AC adaptor from the DC  
IN connector.  
114  
8-1 Power Supply  
               
2
3
Slide the viewfinder longitudinally to the most  
convenient position.  
8-2 Adjusting the  
Viewfinder  
Tighten the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and  
the LOCK knob.  
For maximum viewing convenience, you can adjust the  
viewfinder position in the left-right and backward-forward  
directions.  
8-2-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Focus and Screen  
Adjusting the viewfinder focus  
Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder  
image is sharpest.  
8-2-1 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Position  
Diopter adjustment ring  
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
Adjusting the viewfinder focus  
Adjusting the viewfinder screen  
Adjusting the position to the left or right  
Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the  
viewfinder screen with the controls shown below.  
1
2
3
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Slide the viewfinder to the most convenient position.  
Tighten the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
BRIGHT control  
CONTRAST  
control  
To store the camcorder in the carrying case  
Always store the camcorder with the viewfinder moved  
fully in the direction opposite to the barrel and the  
viewfinder left-right positioning ring tightened.  
PEAKING  
control  
Adjusting the viewfinder screen  
Adjusting the position backward or  
forward  
Adjusting the position backward or forward  
1
Loosen the viewfinder front-rear positioning lever and  
the LOCK knob.  
8-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
115  
           
8-2-3 Detaching the Viewfinder  
8-2-4 Moving the viewfinder shoe  
up  
Viewfinder stopper  
1
Using a hexagonal wrench 2.5 mm across flats,  
remove the bolts (M3 × 25) and spring washers, to  
detach the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body.  
Viewfinder shoe assembly (A-8278-412-G)  
Detaching the viewfinder  
2
Fit two of the four holes in the back of the viewfinder  
shoe over the upper two pins on the fixing plate. Make  
sure that the triangular mark on the viewfinder shoe is  
pointing up.  
1
2
3
Point the viewfinder barrel up or down.  
Loosen the viewfinder left-right positioning ring.  
Holding the viewfinder stopper up, slide the  
viewfinder in the direction indicated by the arrow and  
detach it.  
Pins  
Fit these holes over  
the pins.  
4
Remove the viewfinder cable and microphone cable  
from the clamps and disconnect them.  
Triangular mark  
3
Using the bolts and spring washers removed in step 1,  
fix the viewfinder shoe to the camcorder.  
116  
8-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
       
3
Using a hexagonal wrench 2.5 mm across flats, detach  
the viewfinder shoe from the camcorder body.  
8-2-5 Using the BKW-401  
Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
By fitting a BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket (not  
supplied), you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so  
that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are  
carrying the camcorder.  
4
Using the two bolts (M3 × 10) and washers removed in  
step 2, attach the rotation mechanism assembly of the  
BKW-401 to the camcorder.  
Using the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
To fit the BKW-401 to the camcorder, proceed as follows.  
1
Turn the arm of the rotation mechanism assembly of  
the BKW-401 in the direction of the arrow in the  
following illustration. Next, using a hexagonal wrench  
3 mm across flats, remove the bolts (M4 × 8), to  
separate the rotation mechanism assembly from the  
viewfinder front-back positioning mechanism  
assembly.  
8-2-6 Detaching the Eyepiece  
Removing the eyepiece gives a clearer view of the screen  
from further away. It is also easy to remove dust from the  
viewfinder screen and mirror when the eyepiece is  
detached.  
1
Turn the eyepiece locking ring fully counterclockwise,  
to align the red marks on the locking ring and the  
viewfinder barrel.  
2
Remove the two M3 × 10 hexagon socket bolts from  
the front-back positioning mechanism assembly,  
together with the washers. Take care not to lose these  
bolts and washers.  
Red mark  
Red mark  
Hexagon socket bolts  
(M3 × 10)  
Line up the red marks.  
Locking ring  
2
Detach the eyepiece.  
8-2 Adjusting the Viewfinder  
117  
         
8-3 Mounting the Lens  
To mount the lens, proceed as follows.  
For information about using the lens, refer to the lens  
manual.  
Reattaching the eyepiece  
Lens mount securing rubber  
1
2
Align the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and  
the viewfinder barrel.  
Align the red mark on the end of the eyepiece end with  
the red marks on the eyepiece locking ring and the  
viewfinder barrel. Then insert the eyepiece into the  
viewfinder barrel.  
Mounting the lens  
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens  
mount cap from the lens mount.  
Red mark on the end of the eyepiece  
Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center  
pin on the lens, and insert the lens into the mount.  
3
Turn the eyepiece locking ring clockwise until its  
“LOCK” arrow points at the mark on the viewfinder  
barrel.  
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever  
down to mount the lens.  
Note  
Note  
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while  
the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious  
accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is  
recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be  
put on the lens-locking lever as illustrated above.  
When the eyecup is worn out, replace it with a new one  
(service part number 3-723-079-03).  
(The camcorder was shipped with an eyecup whose part  
number is 3-776-341-01.)  
4
5
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.  
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.  
118  
8-3 Mounting the Lens  
   
8-4 Adjusting the Flange 8-5 Audio Input System  
Focal Length  
8-5-1 Using the Supplied  
If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom  
from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length  
Microphone  
(the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to  
the imaging plane). Make this adjustment after mounting  
or changing the lens.  
You can use the supplied microphone either detached from  
or attached to the camcorder.  
Using the microphone detached from the  
camcorder  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
The position of the controls for adjusting the flange focal  
length vary somewhat from lens to lens. Check the  
identification of the various controls in the lens manual.  
Connect to the MIC IN connector.  
Set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired  
audio recording channel to FRONT.  
About 3 m (10 ft)  
Adjusting the flange focal length  
Using the microphone detached from the camcorder  
1
2
Set the iris to manual.  
Note  
Open the iris. Place the flange focal length adjustment  
chart about 3 m (10 ft) away from the camera, lit well  
enough to provide a satisfactory video output level.  
When using the supplied microphone with an extension  
cable, always use an external power supply type cable.  
Using the microphone attached to the  
camcorder  
3
Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange  
focal length adjustment ring).  
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder  
clamp.  
4
5
Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto.  
Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring  
and focus on it.  
6
7
Set the zoom ring to wide angle.  
Clamp of the  
Microphone holder  
Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus,  
being careful not to disturb the focus ring.  
8
9
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus all the  
way from wide angle to telephoto.  
Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws.  
8-4 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length / 8-5 Audio Input System  
119  
               
2
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Place the microphone in  
the holder so that “UP” is at  
Tighten the screw.  
the top.  
+48V/OFF switch  
Monaural  
microphone  
Close the microphone holder.  
AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2  
connector  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches  
Using an external microphone (not attached to the camcorder)  
3
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector,  
then set the AUDIO IN switch for the desired  
recording channel to FRONT or F.  
XLR connection automatic detection function  
With the XLR connection automatic detection function  
being on, when a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or CH2 connector, the input from that connector is  
automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of  
the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.  
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be  
switched on or off on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO  
item.  
Connect to the MIC IN connector.  
Note  
In order for the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors on  
the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power  
supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted. If the  
microphone cable has a female connector, use an adaptor.  
4
Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp.  
8-5-2 Using an External Microphone  
Using an external microphone attached to  
the camcorder  
You can attach an external microphone to the camcorder.  
You can connect up to two external monaural microphones  
using the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors. One of the  
two can be fitted to the camcorder.  
1
Remove the fixing screws for external microphone  
holder.  
Switch settings when using an external  
microphone  
When using an external microphone, make the following  
switch settings.  
• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC selector to MIC.  
• Make the following setting, depending on the type of  
microphone used.  
Using a microphone with an internal power supply:  
set the +48V/OFF switch to OFF.  
Using a microphone with an external power supply:  
set the +48V/OFF switch to +48V.  
• If the XLR connection automatic detection function (see  
next item) is off (the factory default setting), set the  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switch for the channel to which  
the microphone is connected to “REAR.”  
2
Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.  
120  
8-5 Audio Input System  
         
Note  
When you detach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
once you have attached to the camcorder, be careful  
not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After  
detaching the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws  
back into their original places (see the figure  
illustrating the step 1 operation).  
Screws removed  
in step 1  
CAC-12  
8-5-3 Attaching a UHF Portable  
Tuner (for a UHF Wireless  
Microphone System)  
3
Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone  
adaptor.  
To use a Sony UHF wireless microphone system, fit one of  
the following UHF portable tuners.  
Open the CAC-12.  
• WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
• WRR-862 UHF Portable Tuner.  
For each of these UHF portable tuners, use the following  
attachment procedure.  
Microphone  
adaptor  
1)  
For details, refer to the UHF portable turner manual.  
Loosen the screw.  
Fitting the WRR-855A/855B  
You can use the WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized  
Tuner Unit simply by inserting it into the slot in the  
camcorder, and fastening the fixing screws.  
1) Attach the microphone adaptor when using a small-diameter external  
microphone.  
4
Place an electret condenser microphone in the CAC-  
12.  
1
Undo the four fixing screws holding the cover of the  
slot, and remove the cover.  
Close the CAC-12.  
ECM-672 or  
similar  
microphone  
Tighten the screw.  
m
2
Insert the WRR-855A/855B, and fasten the four fixing  
screws.  
5
Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or AUDIO IN CH2 connector. Set the switches as  
described in the section "Switch settings when using an  
external microphone"(see page 120).  
8-5 Audio Input System  
121  
     
For details about attaching the BP-IL75/GL95/M100  
WRR-855A/  
855B  
BP-IL75/GL95/M100  
Set the AUDIO IN switch (see page 120)  
to WIRELESS for the channel to be used.  
Adjustment screws  
Mount plate  
(supplied with WRR-862)  
For the operation of the WRR-855A/855B, refer to the  
manual supplied with the WRR-855A/855B.  
Back of  
camcorder  
Notes  
Phillips type screwdriver  
• When the XLR connection automatic detection function  
is on, even if the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch is set  
to WIRELESS, the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH1  
or CH2 connector is automatically selected when an  
audio cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2  
connector. In such a case, set REAR XLR AUTO to OFF  
on the AUDIO-1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
• The audio signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and  
4 depend on the settings of the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4  
switches without being affected by the XLR connection  
automatic detection function.  
2
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.  
WRR-862  
Fitting the WRR-862 (Using a BP-IL75/  
GL95/M100 Battery Pack)  
1
(1) Attach the WRR tuner fitting (not supplied,  
service part number: A-8278-057-A) to the back  
of the camcorder.  
3
4
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT  
connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable  
to the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 connector.  
1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the  
four screws placed in the tuner fitting. For  
three of these screws, insert the screwdriver  
through the corresponding hole and tighten the  
screw.  
Set the switches as follows.  
• Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch for the  
channel to which the audio out cable is attached to  
MIC.  
• When the XLR connection automatic detection  
function is off, set the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2  
switch for the channel to which the audio output  
cable is connected to REAR.  
2Loosen the adjustment screws.  
3Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-IL75/  
GL95/M100 Battery Pack to be attached, and  
tighten the adjustment screws to fix its  
position.  
If the XLR connection automatic detection function  
is on, the input signal for audio recording is selected  
automatically, and therefore this setting is not  
required.  
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the  
WRR-862.  
(2) Attach the battery pack.  
122  
8-5 Audio Input System  
LINE/AES/EBU/  
MIC switch  
LINE /AES/EBU /  
MIC switch  
Audio equipment  
to AUDIO IN  
CH1 or CH2  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
switches  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches  
to DC OUT connector  
to AUDIO IN CH1 or  
CH2 connector  
Line input connection  
8-5-4 Connecting Line Input Audio  
Equipment  
Connect the audio output connector of the audio  
equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO  
IN CH1 or CH2 connector.  
Switch settings  
Set the LINE / AES/EBU / MIC switch for the channel to  
which the audio signal source is connected to “LINE.”  
Selecting the audio inputs to be recorded  
• With the XLR connection automatic detection function  
being off (the factory default setting): A signal must be  
selected for audio recording by setting the AUDIO IN  
CH-1 or CH-2 switch to REAR, depending on which of  
the AUDIO IN CH1 and CH2 connectors is used for  
connecting the external audio equipment.  
• With the XLR connection detection function being on:  
When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 or  
CH2 connector, the input from that connector is  
automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of  
the setting of the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 switch.  
The XLR connection automatic detection function can be  
switched on or off on the AUDIO-1 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu, with the REAR XLR AUTO  
item.  
8-5 Audio Input System  
123  
   
Note  
The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position  
even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press  
the red button against the lever a second time and move the  
lever as shown below until the pin returns to the stowed  
position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you  
will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod  
adaptor.  
8-6 Tripod Mounting  
You can easily mount and dismount the camcorder on a  
tripod by using the VCT-14 tripod adaptor (not supplied).  
1
Attach the tripod adaptor to the tripod.  
Stowed position  
Tripod adaptor  
Camera mount  
Pin  
If the pin remains in the engaged position  
2
Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.  
Slide the camcorder  
forward along the groove  
in the adaptor until it  
clicks.  
Removing the camcorder from the tripod  
adaptor  
Whilepressing  
the red button  
against the  
lever, move  
the lever in the  
direction  
indicated by  
the arrow.  
Red button  
Lever  
Removing the camcorder from the tripod adapter  
124  
8-6 Tripod Mounting  
   
8-7 Attaching the  
Shoulder Strap  
8-8 Adjusting the  
Shoulder Pad  
Position  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap as shown below.  
You can shift the shoulder pad from its center position  
(factory setting) backward by up to 10 mm (3/8 inch) or  
forward by up to 25 mm (1 inch). This adjustment helps  
you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder  
on your shoulder.  
Shoulder strap post  
1,3  
Bottom  
Shoulder pad  
2
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Adjusting the shoulder pad position  
Attaching  
1
2
3
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to  
unlock the shoulder pad.  
Pull up the strap to lock  
the fitting.  
Clip  
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is  
in the most convenient position.  
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the  
selected position.  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Removing  
Press here and pull in the direction  
shown by the arrow to release.  
Removing the shoulder strap  
8-7 Attaching the Shoulder Strap / 8-8 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position  
125  
           
8-9 Putting on the Rain Cover (Not Supplied)  
Attach the rain cover (part number 3-191-064-02) as  
illustrated below. You can insert and remove cassette  
tapes, operate various switches and controls, and mount  
the camcorder on the tripod adaptor with the rain cover  
attached.  
Insert the viewfinder barrel here with the eyecup out  
and fasten the drawstring around the eyecup.  
Whenashoulder  
belt is not used,  
cover the holes  
on the rain cover  
with caps.  
When you use a  
shoulder strap,  
use these holes.  
For details, see  
the following  
diagram.  
Drawstring  
Velcro tape  
Rear  
Front  
Velcro tape  
Velcro tape  
Drawstring  
Pass the shoulder strap post clearly through this hole  
on the rain cover.  
126  
8-9 Putting on the Rain Cover (Not Supplied)  
   
function is assigned) when the remote control unit is  
connected, using the REC START/STOP item on the  
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
8-10 Connecting the  
Remote Control Unit  
To disable the camcorder REC START button and  
the lens VTR button  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set REC START/STOP to “RM”.  
If the same function as that of the REC START button is  
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO  
GAIN button, this setting also disables these controls.  
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit (not  
supplied) enables remote control of the principal camera  
functions.  
Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE  
connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into  
remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control  
unit, the remote control mode is canceled.  
To enable the camcorder REC START button and  
the lens VTR button  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set REC START/STOP to “CAM”.  
If the same function as that of the REC START button is  
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO  
GAIN button, this setting also enables these controls.  
RM-B150/B750  
To enable all of the camcorder REC START  
button, the lens VTR button, and the remote  
control unit VTR button  
REMOTE  
connector  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set REC START/STOP to “PARA”.  
Remote control cable  
If the same function as that of the REC START button is  
assigned to the ASSIGN 1/3/4 switch or the TURBO  
GAIN button, this setting also enables these controls.  
Camcorder switch functions when the  
remote control unit is connected  
The following switches on the camcorder do not function.  
• GAIN selector  
When the monitor is connected to the  
MONITOR OUT connector of the remote  
control unit  
• OUTPUT/DCC switch  
• WHITE BAL switch  
• AUTO W/B BAL switch  
• SHUTTER selector  
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/  
B750 outputs the same signal as that from the TEST OUT  
connector on the camcorder.  
• TURBO GAIN button (ASSIGN 1 switch to which the  
TURBO GAIN function is assigned)  
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to  
connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the  
RM-B150/B750.  
• REC START button (VTR button on the lens and the  
ASSIGN 1/3/4 or the TURBO GAIN switch to which the  
REC START/STOP function is assigned) (When the  
REC START/STOP item on the FUNCTION 3 page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu is set to RM.)  
For details of the function of the REC START button, see  
When the remote control unit is  
disconnected from the camcorder  
The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect  
before the remote control unit was connected.  
By making a menu setting, the setting of the paint  
adjustment made with the remote control unit can be  
retained even after the remote control unit is removed from  
the camcorder.  
Paint adjustment when the remote control  
unit is connected  
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the  
last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.  
on the next page.  
Function of the REC START button when  
the remote control unit is connected  
You can select the function of the REC START button on  
the camcorder (also, VTR button on the lens and the  
ASSIGN 1 switch to which the REC START/STOP  
8-10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit  
127  
       
Structure of the paint adjustment data  
can use settings of the paint adjustment data stored in the  
independent data region even if you connect the remote  
control unit. In this case, the settings stored in the  
independent data region will be renewed when you change  
the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings  
of the paint data made with the remote control unit can be  
retained even if the remote control unit is removed.  
However, if the switch position on the remote control unit  
differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position  
on the camcorder takes precedence over that on the remote  
control unit.  
Non-volatile memory  
Independent data  
region  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
Setup  
DETAIL LEVEL  
menu of  
Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect  
before you connect the remote control unit. In this case,  
you should set the control knob to the relative value mode  
on the remote control unit.  
R/B GAIN  
the  
cam-  
corder  
R/B BLACK  
Hardware  
of the  
camera  
RM-  
B150  
Remote control data  
region  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with  
the remote control unit.  
RM-B150  
connected  
or not  
R/B BLACK  
connected  
As the illustration above shows, the non-volatile memory  
of the camcorder consists of two regions: one is the  
independent data region that becomes effective when the  
remote control unit is not connected, and the other is the  
remote control data region that becomes effective when the  
remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is  
automatically selected depending on whether or not the  
remote control unit is connected to the camcorder.  
Thus, when the remote control unit is connected to the  
camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the  
remote control data region and the settings of the paint  
adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote  
control unit was used are recalled.  
1)  
Settings of the absolute value control knobs and absolute  
2)  
value switches are overwritten by those on the remote  
control unit after the remote control unit is connected.  
1) Absolute value control knob  
The data corresponding to the rotation degree (position) of the control  
knobs is output. The data corresponding to the rotation amount is called  
the relative value control knob.  
2) Absolute value switch  
Like the toggle switches or slide switches (except the momentary  
switches), the switches (or controls) whose positions must coincide with  
their functions are called absolute value switches.  
When the remote control unit is removed from the  
camcorder, the independent data region becomes effective.  
Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in  
effect before the remote control unit was connected.  
When RM COMMON MEMORY is set to ON on the  
FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you  
128  
8-10 Connecting the Remote Control Unit  
 
Maintenance  
9
Chapter  
4
After confirming that the disc is not write-protected,  
load the disc and close the disc compartment lid.  
9-1 Testing the  
Camcorder Before  
Condensation  
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a  
warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may  
form on the optical pickup. Then, if the camcorder is  
operated in this state, recording and playback may not be  
performed properly. Do the following to prevent this from  
happening.  
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an  
environment where condensation may form, be sure to  
load a disc in advance and close the disc compartment  
lid.  
Shooting  
Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for  
a shooting session, preferably by operating the camcorder  
together with a color video monitor.  
9-1-1 Preparations for Testing  
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID  
indicator does not appear on the color LCD. If it  
appears, wait until it disappears before loading a disc.  
3
4
1
9-1-2 Testing the Camera  
2
Set the switches and selectors as follows.  
1
2
Attach a fully charged battery pack.  
Iris: Automatic  
Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the  
HUMID indicator does not appear and that the BATT  
indicator shows at least five segments.  
• If the HUMID indicator appears, wait until it  
disappears.  
• If the BATT indicator does not show at least five  
segments, replace the battery pack with a fully  
charged one.  
Zoom: SERVO/MAN  
WHITE BAL: A or B  
VDR SAVE/STBY: SAVE  
GAIN: Set as low as possible.  
OUTPUT/DCC: BARS  
3
Check that there are no obstructions near the disc  
compartment, and then press the EJECT button to  
open the disc compartment lid.  
9-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
129  
                   
8
9
Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT, and  
check that when sound is input to a microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the  
camcorder, the audio level indicators appear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
Testing the viewfinder  
1
2
Adjust the position of the viewfinder.  
Check that the color bars are displayed on the  
viewfinder screen, and adjust the BRIGHT,  
CONTRAST, and PEAKING controls to give the best  
color bar display.  
Check that setting the ZEBRA switch to ON and OFF  
makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the  
viewfinder screen.  
3
Check each of the following operations.  
Note  
• The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen.  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page  
changes to the next page.  
The results of checking in steps 3 to 9 may not be as  
expected, depending on the settings relating to the  
viewfinder display function. In this case, set the desired  
items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the USER  
menu.  
• Press the MENU knob and check that settings of  
each item of the selected page are displayed.  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the b mark  
moves within the page.  
• Press the MENU knob and check that the b mark  
placed before the item changes to a z mark and the  
zmark placed before the setting of the item changes  
to a ? mark.  
Testing the iris and zoom functions  
• Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of  
the selected item changes.  
1
2
3
Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that  
the power zoom operates correctly.  
4
5
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM, and change  
the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1, 2, 3  
and 4.  
Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder  
screen displays the correct numbers.  
Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the  
zoom functions manually.  
Set the iris switch on the lens to AUTO and point the  
camera at objects of different brightness. Check that  
the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly.  
Carry out of the following operations, and check that  
that the ! indicator lights if the corresponding item has  
been turned on on the '!' LED page of the USER menu.  
4
5
Set the iris switch on the lens to MANUAL and check  
that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris  
correctly.  
• Set the gain to anything but 0 dB by using the GAIN  
selector and the GAIN SW page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
• Set the SHUTTER selector to ON.  
• Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
• Use the lens extender.  
Set the iris switch on the lens back to AUTO and check  
the following points when the GAIN selector is moved  
from L to M to H.  
• For objects of the same brightness, the iris is  
adjusted to correspond to the change in setting.  
• The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes  
to correspond to the change in setting.  
• Set the FILTER selector to other than the position  
‘1’ (PDW-510/510P) or other than the position ‘1B’  
(PDW-530/530P).  
• Set the reference value of the auto iris to other than  
the standard value.  
6
If an extender mechanism is incorporated in your lens,  
put the extender lever of the lens into the 2x position  
and check the following points.  
6
7
Move the SHUTTER selector from ON to SELECT  
repeatedly, and check that the shutter setting changes  
on the viewfinder screen.  
• The indication “EX” appears at the top left on the  
viewfinder screen.  
• The auto iris functions correctly.  
Pointing the camera at a suitable subject, focus the  
camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen.  
9-1-3 Testing the VDR  
Perform tests (1) to (7) consecutively.  
130  
9-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
   
2
Set the AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2 switches to  
AUTO.  
(1) Testing the recording and playback  
functions  
3
4
Set the AUDIO IN CH-3/CH-4 switches to F (front).  
1
2
3
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to SAVE and check  
that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes on.  
Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN  
connector at a suitable sound source. Check that the  
level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the  
sound level, respectively.  
Set the VDR SAVE/STBY switch to STBY and check  
that the SAVE indicator in the viewfinder goes off.  
Set the switches located below the color LCD as  
follows.  
(3) Testing the manual audio level  
adjusting functions  
LCD switch: L or H  
DISP SEL switch: STATUS  
DISPLAY switch: COUNTER  
1
2
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
Turn the MIC LEVEL control. Check that the channel-  
1 and -2 audio level meters on the color and  
monochrome LCDs show more and more segments as  
you turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the  
front of the camcorder.  
4
5
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET,  
and set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN to R-RUN.  
Press the REC START button and check the following  
points.  
• The indication in the counter display is changing.  
• The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on.  
• The RF and SERVO indicators on the color LCD are  
off.  
(4) Testing the earphone and speaker  
1
2
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that  
the speaker volume changes accordingly.  
6
7
Press the REC START button again and check that  
recording stops and that the REC indicator in the  
viewfinder goes off.  
Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE  
jack. Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that  
you can hear the sound from the microphone in the  
earphone.  
Repeat the checks of steps 5 and 6, this time using the  
VTR button on the lens.  
3
4
Turn the MONITOR volume control and check that  
the earphone volume changes accordingly.  
Press the RESET button and check that the indication  
in the counter display on each of the color and  
monochrome LCDs is “00:00:00:00”.  
Connect the earphone to the other EARPHONE jack.  
Check the earphone as in step 3.  
8
9
Press the F REV button and check that fast reverse  
playback is performed. Next, press the PLAY button  
and check that normal playback is performed.  
(5) Testing external microphones  
You can do this test by using both of the AUDIO IN CH1  
and CH2 connectors simultaneously. Alternatively, you  
can do the test by using one of the connectors, and then  
execute the same procedure using the other connector.  
The following is the testing procedure when both  
connectors are used.  
Press the STOP button and check that playback stops.  
Next, press the F FWD button and check that fast  
forward playback is performed.  
10Press the STOP button again, then press the PREV  
button. Check that the image of the beginning of the  
current or previous clip is displayed.  
1
2
Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH1/  
CH2 connectors.  
11Press the NEXT button, and check that the image of  
Set the +48V/OFF switches as follows.  
the beginning of the next clip is displayed.  
• If the connected microphone is of the internal power  
supply type, set the switch to OFF.  
• If the connected microphone is of the external power  
supply type, set the switch to +48V.  
(2) Testing the automatic audio level  
adjusting functions  
1
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to REAR.  
9-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
131  
4
5
Aim the microphones at a sound source.  
5
6
Press the REC START button again, and check that  
recording stops and that the time code indication stops  
changing.  
Check that the audio level meters on the color and  
monochrome LCDs and the audio level indicators in  
the viewfinder reflect the changing sound level.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN, and  
check that the time code indication starts changing  
again and continues to change even when you restart  
recording and stop recording again.  
(6) Checking the XLR connection  
automatic detection function  
Before starting to check, remove the front microphone  
connected to the MIC IN connector if it is connected.  
You can do this test by using both of the AUDIO IN CH1  
and CH2 connectors simultaneously. Alternatively, you  
can do the test by using one of connectors, and then  
execute the same procedure using the other connector.  
The following is the testing procedure when both  
connectors are used.  
7
Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT, and check that the  
user bit data that was set is displayed.  
1
Perform the operations of steps 1 and 2 explained in  
(5) “Testing external microphones”.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 switches to FRONT.  
Perform the operations of steps 4 and 5 explained in  
(5) “Testing external microphones”.  
If the audio level meters on the color and monochrome  
LCDs and the audio level indicators in the viewfinder  
reflect the changing sound level, the function of the  
XLR connection automatic detection is working  
correctly.  
If it does not reflect the changing sound level, the  
function of the XLR connection automatic detection  
function is off. Set REAR XLR AUTO to “ON” on the  
VDR MODE 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
If it does not reflect even after making this setting, the  
XLR connection automatic detection function does not  
work correctly.  
(7) Checking the user bit and time code  
functions  
1
Set the user bits as required.  
2
Set the time code.  
3
4
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
Press the REC START button, and check that  
recording starts and that the time code indication in the  
counter display changes.  
132  
9-1 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting  
Be sure to correctly assemble the fog-proof filter, the  
packing ring, and the eyecup so that the reassembled  
eyepiece is waterproof.  
9-2 Maintenance  
Note  
9-2-1 Cleaning the Viewfinder  
When cleaning the fog-proof filter, wipe it very gently  
with a soft cloth to avoid damaging the anti-fogging  
coating.  
Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror  
inside the viewfinder barrel.  
Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially  
available lens cleaner.  
Caution  
Never use organic solvents such as thinners.  
Disassembling the eyepiece for cleaning  
Eyecup  
holder  
Eyecup  
Viewfinder  
barrel  
Protecting  
filter  
Packing  
ring  
1
Detach the eyepiece from the viewfinder barrel.  
For the detaching procedure, see 8-2-6 “Detaching  
2
3
Remove the eyecup from the eyecup holder.  
Remove the protecting filter, together with the packing  
ring, from inside the eyecup holder.  
4
Detach the protecting filter from the packing ring.  
Fog-proof filter  
Depending on the temperature and humidity, the  
protecting filter may mist because of vapor or your breath.  
To ensure that the viewfinder is always clear, replace the  
protecting filter with a fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-  
341-11, not supplied).  
Fitting the fog-proof filter  
Replace the protecting filter on the packing ring with the  
fog-proof filter.  
9-2 Maintenance  
133  
       
9-3 Operation Warnings  
When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a  
warning is given by the relevant indicators on the color and  
monochrome LCDs, in the viewfinder and on the  
camcorder body. The speaker and earphone also give  
audible warnings.  
Operation warnings  
Indicators on color/  
monochrome LCDs  
Indicators in viewfinder/on  
camcorder body  
Warning sounds  
Problem  
VDR opera-  
tion  
Action to  
take  
Warning/ Flashing/  
:4 beeps/s  
:1 beep/s  
:Continuous  
:4 flashes/s  
:1 flash/s  
Battery  
status  
indication  
continuous  
:
WARNING REC/tally BATT  
Continuous beep  
1)  
1)  
RF  
(on color  
LCD only)  
Problem in Recording  
If recording is  
substandard,  
turn off the  
power and  
consult your  
Sony  
Continuous  
recording  
circuit  
continues but  
may be  
substandard.  
representative.  
SERVO  
(on color  
LCD only)  
Continuous  
Servo lock  
lost.  
Recording  
continues but  
may be  
Turn off the  
power and  
consult your  
Sony  
substandard.  
representative.  
Note that this  
indication may  
be given  
momentarily  
when  
recording/  
playback  
begins, but this  
does not  
indicate a  
problem.  
1)  
2)  
HUMID  
(on color  
LCD only)  
Continuous  
Condensa- Recording/  
Stop recording/  
playback, turn  
off the power,  
then turn it on  
tion on the  
optical  
playback  
continues but  
stops when an  
pickup.  
error occurs on again, and wait  
the drive.  
until the  
HUMID  
indicator  
disappears.  
3)  
1)  
1)  
6)  
1)  
1)  
Disc almost Operation  
Be prepared to  
change the  
disc.  
DISC  
Flashing  
full.  
continues.  
6)  
6)  
DISC and E Flashing  
BATT Flashing  
Disc full.  
Recording  
stops.  
Change the  
disc.  
4)  
Battery  
almost  
exhausted.  
Operation  
continues.  
Change the  
battery.  
5)  
BATT and E Flashing  
Battery  
exhausted. stops.  
Operation  
Change the  
battery.  
1) During recording  
6) During recording pause  
2) During playback, fast forward, fast reverse, or stop  
3) Also, “5-0” appears for the disc remaining indication.  
4) During recording or stop mode  
5) During auto interval recording mode, once the VDR stops.  
134  
9-3 Operation Warnings  
     
Operation/error messages  
An operation or error message is displayed in the  
operation/error message display area in the viewfinder.  
Operation/error  
message  
Meaning  
AUTO INTERVAL  
**M**S  
Indicates the camera is in the Auto  
Interval Rec mode. **M**S  
indicates the shooting interval.  
MANU INTERVAL  
*FRAME  
Indicates the camera is in the  
single shot mode of the Manual  
Interval Rec mode. *FRAME  
indicates the number of frames.  
INTERVAL **S(M/  
H)*FRAME  
Indicates the camera is in the  
consecutive mode of the Manual  
Interval Rec mode. **S(M/H)  
indicates the trigger interval and  
*FRAME indicates the number of  
frames.  
LOW LIGHT  
REC INH.  
Appears, depending on the setting,  
to indicate the subject illumination  
is inadequate.  
Appears when attempting to record  
on a write-protected disc.  
Humid Disturbed INT  
REC  
Appears when there are portions  
where recording has failed due to  
condensation while shooting  
pictures at intervals (using the  
interval rec function).  
ON-BOARD BATTERY Appears when the backup battery  
EMPTY  
for the internal clock has been used  
up.  
1)  
1) To replace the backup battery, contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
Notes on CCD image sensors  
Vertical smear  
Smear tends to be produced when an extremely bright  
object is being shot; it is more likely to occur with a faster  
electronic shutter speed.  
Vertical tails show on the  
image.  
Bright object (mercury lamp,  
the sun, reflections, etc.)  
Monitor screen  
Vertical smear  
Aliasing  
When patterns of stripes or lines are shot, they may appear  
jagged.  
9-3 Operation Warnings  
135  
 
136  
9-3 Operation Warnings  
Appendixes  
Dimensions in mm (inches)  
Specifications  
General  
Power voltage  
12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V  
Power consumption  
Approx. 36 W (with 12 V DC supply, when  
recording with the color LCD off)  
Operating temperature  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Operating humidity  
25% to 85% (relative humidity)  
Storage temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Recording format  
Video: MPEG IMX (50/40/30 Mbps), DVCAM (25  
332 (13 1/8)  
Supplied accessories  
Shoulder strap (1)  
Monaural microphone (super cardioid directional,  
external power supply type) (1)  
Operation manuals  
Mbps)  
Proxy video: MPEG-4  
Audio:  
1)  
English version (1)  
Japanese version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
MPEG IMX: 16 bits or 24 bits, 48 kHz,  
4 channels  
DVCAM: 16 bits/48 kHz  
Proxy audio: A-law (8 bits, 8 kHz, 8/4 channels)  
Video Camera Section  
1) The MPEG-4 CODEC is a product of Ingenient Technologies, Inc.  
General  
Imager  
2
/ -inch type 16:9 widescreen Power HAD EX  
3
CCD  
Continuous operating time  
Total picture elements  
1038 (H) × 1008 (V) for PDW-510/530  
1038 (H) × 1188 (V) for PDW-510P/530P  
Effective picture elements  
Approx. 90 min. (with BP-IL75)  
Approx. 120 min. (with BP-GL95)  
Mass Approx. 4.1 kg (9 lb) (main body only)  
Approx. 5.8 kg (12 lb 12 oz) (with microphone,  
viewfinder, disc and BP-IL75 Battery  
Pack)  
980 (H) × 988 (V) for PDW-510/530  
980 (H) × 1164(V) for PDW-510P/530P  
Imager Configuration  
RGB 3 CCDs  
Spectral system  
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)  
Built-in filters  
Specifications  
137  
           
PDW-510/510P  
CC + ND filter  
A: 3200K  
Optical Disc Drive Section  
1
B: 5600K + / ND  
C: 5600K  
D: 5600K + / ND  
8
General  
1
Usable disc  
PFD23 Professional Disc  
64  
Data transfer rate  
Max. 72Mbps (per optical head)  
PDW-530/530P  
CC filter  
A: Cross filter  
Recording/playback time  
MPEG IMX 50Mbps: 45 minutes  
40Mbps: 55 minutes  
30Mbps: 68 minutes  
DVCAM: 85 minutes  
B: 3200K  
C: 4300K  
D: 6300K  
ND filter  
A: Clear  
Digital video  
Sampling frequency  
1
B: / ND  
4
1
C: / ND  
16  
Y: 13.5 MHz  
R–Y/B–Y: 6.75 MHz  
1
D: / ND  
64  
Quantization  
10 bits/sample (8 bits/sample for  
compression processing)  
2
Lens mount  
Sensitivity  
/ -inch 48 bayonet mount  
3
Compression MPEG-2 4:2:2P@ML 50/40/30 Mbps or  
DVCAM  
F11 standard (89.9% reflection chart, 2000 lx)  
Minimum illumination  
0.13 1x (at F1.4, +48 dB gain)  
Video S/N ratio  
Audio (with standard playback machine)  
65 dB (Y typical) (for PDW-510/530)  
63 dB (Y typical) (for PDW-510P/530P)  
Modulation (at screen center)  
4:3 mode: 55%  
16:9 mode: 70%  
Registration  
Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz –1.0 dB  
Dynamic range  
Distortion (THD)  
Cross talk  
85 dB min.  
0.08% max.  
–70 dB max.  
Wow and flutter  
Below measurable limit  
0.05% or less for entire screen area (excluding  
distortion due to lens)  
Input/output connectors  
Geometric distortion  
Signal inputs  
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2  
None identified (excluding distortion due to  
lens)  
XLR type, 3-pin, female  
–60 dBu/+4 dBu  
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.)  
Smear  
LCD panel  
6.3 cm (2.5 inches)  
–140 dB (Y-typical)  
Pixel resolution: 211,200 pixels (960 wide ×  
MIC IN  
GENLOCK IN  
XLR type, 3-pin, female –60 dBu  
BNC type  
220 high)  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
TC IN  
BNC type  
Viewfinder  
0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 k Ω  
CRT  
Horizontal resolution  
4:3 mode: 600 TV lines (at screen center)  
16:9 mode: 450 TV lines (at screen center)  
2-inch monochrome, quick start type  
Signal outputs  
TEST OUT  
BNC type  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
VIDEO OUT  
BNC type, 75 , unbalanced  
VBS OUT: 1.0 Vp-p  
SDI OUT: 0.8 Vp-p (only when the CBK-SD01 is  
installed)  
AUDIO OUT  
TC OUT  
EARPHONE (minijack)  
XLR type, 5-pin, male, 0 dBm  
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
8 , –to –18 dBs variable  
Others  
DC IN  
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC  
138  
Specifications  
   
DC OUT  
4-pin, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated  
Audio equipment  
ECM-672 Microphone  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
CCXA-53 Audio Cable (for converting 5-pin connector to  
two 3-pin connectors)  
current 0.2 A  
12-pin  
8-pin  
2-pin  
6-pin  
LENS  
REMOTE  
LIGHT  
i.LINK  
WRR-855A/855B UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-862 UHF Portable Tuner  
WRT-8T UHF Transmitter  
WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)  
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer  
Recommended Additional  
Equipment  
For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether  
the connector is male or female and the number of pins on  
the connector.  
Power supply and related equipment  
BP- IL75/GL95 Battery Pack  
BP-M100 Battery Pack  
BC-M50/M150 Battery Charger  
AC-550/550CE AC Adaptor  
AC-DN2B AC Adaptor  
The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female  
and 3-pin and the audio output connectors are male and 5-  
pin. A converting adaptor may be required depending on  
the audio equipment to be connected to the camcorder.  
CA-701/702/702P Camera Adaptor  
Viewfinder and related equipment  
Extension boards  
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket  
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-11)  
Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)  
Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-8262-538-  
A)  
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special  
compensation for aberrations) (Part  
No. A-8267-737-A)  
CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board  
CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board  
CBK-FC01 Pull Down Board (for the PDW-510/530 only)  
Equipment for maintenance and easier  
handling  
LC-777 Hard Carrying Case  
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case  
Tripod Adaptor VCT-14  
Rain cover  
Optical attachments  
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-685-01)  
8
Maintenance Manual  
1
ND filter ( / ND) (Part No. 3-174-683-01)  
32  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Consult your Sony representative for more information  
about these filters.  
Equipment for remote control  
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit  
“Memory Stick”  
MSA-16A (16 MB)  
MSA-32A (32 MB)  
MSA-64A (64 MB)  
MSA-128A (128 MB)  
Specifications  
139  
     
Menu List  
This section briefly explains menus that the camcorder  
provides for adjustments and settings using tables.  
This manual also explains some adjustments and settings  
to be made using the OPERATION menu, PAINT menu,  
MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu and DIAGNOSIS  
menu.  
For the menu organization and the USER menu, see  
Chapter 6.  
For details of these menus, refer to the Maintenance  
Manual.  
OPERATION Menu List  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
OPERATION menu. Some pages of the OPERATION  
menu have been registered in the USER menu at the  
factory. These pages are indicated by a circle (a) in the  
USER menu column. The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu allows you to add and delete pages in the USER  
menu to suit your requirements.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
01  
OUTPUT  
LCD BRIGHT <L>  
LCD BRIGHT <H>  
LCD COLOR  
(–32 to +31)  
(–32 to +31)  
(–32 to +31)  
ENABL/DSABL  
VBS/SDI  
0
0
0
I.LINLK SBP2 MODE  
DSABL  
VBS  
REAR BNC OUT SEL  
(when option board is  
connected)  
a
02  
TEST OUT  
TEST OUT MARKER  
TEST OUT VFDISP  
TEST OUT MENU  
TEST OUT ZEBRA  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Selects whether or not the  
marker signal is mixed to the  
output signal from the TEST  
OUT connector  
Selects whether or not the VF  
DISP display signal is mixed  
to the output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
Selects whether or not the  
MENU display signal is mixed  
to the output signal from the  
TEST OUT connector.  
Selects whether or not the  
ZEBRA display signal is  
mixed to the output signal  
from the TEST OUT  
connector.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
ENC  
Selects the output signal of  
TEST OUT.  
140  
Menu List  
           
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
03  
FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1>  
OFF/P.CACHE/  
ATW  
See 6-3-5 “Assigning  
CHARA/MARKR/  
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/  
RET/REC/TURBO/  
D5600/ZEBRA/  
FREZE/M.FRZ etc.  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
OFF/P.CACHE/  
CHARA/MARKR/  
V.SRC/ZEBRA/  
FREZE/5600 etc.  
OFF  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
TURBO SW  
WZOOM/TZOOM/  
REC/RET etc.  
OFF  
WZOOM/TZOOM/  
REC/RET etc.  
OFF  
OFF/P.CACHE/  
TURBO  
CHARA/MARKR/  
RTAKE/ATW/RET.V/  
RET/REC/TURBO/  
D5600/ZEBRA/  
FREZE/M.FRZ etc.  
DF/NDF  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
DF/NDF  
DF  
Switches between drop-frame  
(DF) mode and non-drop  
frame (NDF) mode.  
CACHE/INTVAL REC  
OFF/CACHE/A.INT/ OFF  
M.INT/S.INT  
(CACHE)  
0/1//2/3/4/5/6/8SEC 0SEC  
P.CACHE TIME  
(A.INT)  
TAKE TOTAL TIME  
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5MIN  
MIN,  
1/2/3/4/5/7/10/15/20/  
30/40/50/70/100 H  
(A.INT)  
REC TIME  
5/10/15/20/30/40/50 5SEC  
SEC,  
1 to 60 MIN  
(A.INT or S.INT)  
PRE-LIGHTING  
OFF/2SEC/5SEC/  
10SEC  
OFF  
1
(M.INT or S.INT)  
1/2/4/8  
NUMBER OF FRAME  
(S.INT)  
TRIGGER INTERVAL  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/ 1SEC  
50 SEC,  
1 to 10/15/20/30/40/  
50 MIN,  
1/2/3/4/6/12/24H  
Menu List  
141  
 
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
04  
FUNCTION 2 D5600  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function  
which electrically applies a  
5600K color temperature  
filter.  
WIDE AWB  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns on and off the function  
which widens the range  
adjustable by Auto White  
Balance.  
WHITE SWITCH <B>  
SHOCKLESS WHITE  
MEM/ATW  
OFF/1/2/3  
MEM  
1
Sets the function of the  
WHITE BAL B switch.  
Changes the white gain  
smoothly when operating the  
WHITE BAL switch.  
ATW SPEED  
1/2/3/4/5  
4
Sets the convergence speed  
for Auto Tracing White  
balance.  
ZOOM SPEED  
LOW LIGHT  
0 to 99  
20  
Sets the zoom speed when a  
serial lens is connected  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns the warning display on  
or off when the video average  
level is less than the preset  
value.  
LOW LIGHT LEVEL  
VF BATT WARNING  
0 to 99  
16  
Sets the level at which the  
LOW LIGHT function  
becomes effective.  
10/20%  
10%  
Sets the threshold value of  
remaining battery capacity to  
make the remaining capacity  
indication flash.  
05  
POWER  
SAVE  
i.LILNK DV I/O  
ENABL/DSABL  
EE/SAVE  
DSABL  
EE  
Selects whether to enable  
(ENABL) or disable (DSABL)  
i.LINK (AV/C).  
REC AUDIO OUT  
Selects whether to output an  
E-E signal (EE) or mute  
(SAVE) from the AUDIO OUT  
connector, during recording.  
NETWORK  
ENABL/DSABL  
VDRSW/SAVE  
DSABL  
THUMBNAIL  
VDRSW Selects whether the Linux  
CPU for thumbnail display  
should be always in the  
“SAVE” state (SAVE), or  
should follow the setting of  
the VDR switch (VDRSW).  
a
06  
VF DISP 1  
VF DISP  
OFF/ON  
1/2/3  
OFF  
3
VF DISPLAY MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP DISC  
DISP IRIS  
142  
Menu List  
   
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
07  
VF DISP 2  
DISP ZOOM  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON  
DISP COLOR TEMP.  
DISP BATT REMAIN  
DISP DC IN  
OFF  
INT  
INT/VOLT/AUTO  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
DISP WRR RF LVL  
DISP TIME CODE  
DISP REC FORMAT  
DISP GPS  
a
08  
'!'LED  
GAIN  
<!>  
<!>  
SHUTTER  
ON  
WHT PRESET<!>  
ATW RUN <!>  
EXTENDER <!>  
FILTER <!>  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
OVERRIDE <!>  
MARKER  
a
09  
MARKER 1  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
80/90/92.5/95%  
OFF/ON  
16:9/13:9/4:3  
OFF/ON  
1/2, 1/4, 1/8  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
90%  
OFF  
4:3  
CENTER  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT  
ASPECT SELECT  
ASPECT MASK  
ASPECT MASK LVL  
100% MARKER  
USER BOX  
OFF  
1/4  
OFF  
OFF  
245  
10  
MARKER 2  
Turns the box cursor on or off.  
USER BOX WIDTH  
1 to 465  
Width (from the center to right  
or left side)  
USER BOX HEIGHT  
1 to 120  
72  
Height (from the center to top  
or bottom)  
USER BOX H POS.  
USER BOX V POS.  
CENTER H POS.  
–461 to +461  
–118 to +118  
–48 to +47  
0
0
0
H position of the center  
V position of the center  
H position of the center  
marker  
CENTER V POS.  
–15 to +14  
0
V position of the center  
marker  
a
11  
GAIN SW  
GAIN LOW  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/  
30/36/42/48  
0
See 6-3-1 “Setting Gain  
GAIN MID  
9
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND.  
18  
42  
OFF  
OFF/ON  
Menu List  
143  
         
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
a
12  
VF SETTING ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
1
1/2/BOTH  
20 to 107  
ZEBRA1 DET.LVL  
ZEBRA1 APT.LVL  
ZEBRA2 DET.LVL  
VF DETAIL LEVEL  
VF ASPECT  
70  
1 to 20  
10  
52 to 109  
100  
0
–4 to +195  
AUTO/16:9  
OFF/ON  
AUTO  
OFF  
2
a
13  
AUTO IRIS  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
See 5-4 “Changing the  
Automatic Iris Adjustment” on  
0/1/2/3/4/5  
OFF/ON  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND.  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
ID-1  
OFF  
1
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
245  
72  
20 to 465  
20 to 120  
–447 to +446  
–104 to +104  
12 characters  
0
0
a
a
14  
15  
SHOT ID  
ID-2  
ID-3  
ID-4  
SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
See 6-2-6 “Recording Shot  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT MODEL NAME  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ OFF  
ID-4  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
SHOT BLINK CHARA  
a
16  
17  
SET STATUS STATUS ABNORMAL  
STATUS FUNTION  
See 6-2-8 “Displaying the  
ON  
STATUS AUDIO  
ON  
STATUS GPS  
OFF  
(when option board is  
connected)  
OFFSET  
WHT  
OFFSET WHITE <A>  
WARM – COOL <A>  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
See 6-3-4 “Specifying an  
Display color  
temperature  
3200  
COLOR FINE <A>  
OFFSET WHITE <B>  
WARM – COOL <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
OFF  
3200  
Display color  
temperature  
COLOR FINE <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
0
144  
Menu List  
           
USER  
menu  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
18  
SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
1 to 16  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1
See 5-3 “Setting the  
65.  
The items which can be set  
differ depending on the CCD  
scan mode setting (see page  
SHUTTER 1/60  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
a
19  
20  
LENS FILE  
FORMAT  
LENS FILE SELECT  
F.ID  
16:9/4:3 SELECT  
16:9/4:3  
16:9  
SCAN MODE  
I/PsF  
UC/J  
I
UC/J SELECT  
UC  
Selects the signal format.  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
21  
SOURCE  
SEL  
REC VIDEO SOURCE  
EXT REC CONTROL  
I.LINK SBP2 MODE  
CAM/EXT  
CAM  
See 3-4 “Recording Video  
OFF/ON  
REC  
ENABL/DSABL  
MONO/STREO  
DSABL  
STREO  
FRONT MIC SELECT  
(when stereo microphone  
is connected)  
EXT VIDEO SOURCE  
(when option board is  
connected)  
ILINK/CMPST  
SYNC/VIDEO  
0.0/7.5%  
ILINK  
EXT OUTPUT DELAY  
(when option board is  
connected)  
ILINK/  
CMPST  
SETUP REMOVE  
7.5%  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
Menu List  
145  
       
PAINT Menu List  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
PAINT menu.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Default Description  
01  
SW STATUS  
GAMMA  
CHROMA  
ON  
ON  
Turns the gamma correction on or off.  
Turns the chroma of the composite signal on  
or off.  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON/OFF  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Turns the linear matrix correction on or off.  
Turns the knee correction on or off.  
Turns the white clipping correction on or off.  
Turns the detail signal on or off.  
Turns the aperture function on or off.  
Turns the flare function on or off.  
Turns the EVS shutter on or off.  
Selects the test signal.  
KNEE  
WHITE CLIP  
DETAIL  
APERTURE  
FLARE  
EVS  
TEST SAW  
COLOR TEMP <A>  
OFF/REC/SAW OFF  
02  
WHITE  
Color  
3200  
Sets the temperature of WHITE A.  
temperature  
values  
COLOR FINE <A>  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Adjusts the value more precisely when the  
color temperature adjustment through  
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600 <A>  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
0
OFF  
Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K filter on  
or off.  
COLOR TEMP <B>  
COLOR FINE <B>  
Color  
temperature  
values  
0
0
Sets the temperature of WHITE B.  
(–99 to +99)  
Adjusts the value more precisely when the  
color temperature adjustment through  
COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <B>  
D5600 <B>  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
OFF  
Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on  
or off.  
03  
BLACK/FLARE MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Adjusts the master black level.  
Adjusts the R black level.  
0
B BLACK  
0
Adjusts the B black level.  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
0
Adjusts the flare level of the master.  
Adjusts the R flare level.  
0
G FLARE  
0
Adjusts the G flare level.  
B FLARE  
0
Adjusts the B flare level.  
FLARE  
ON  
ENC  
Turns the flare correction circuit on or off.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
146  
Menu List  
         
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default Description  
04  
GAMMA  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the gamma correction function on or  
off.  
STEP GAMMA  
0.35 to 0.90  
0.45  
Sets the master gamma correction curve in  
steps.  
MASTER GAMMA  
R GAMMA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
0
Sets the master gamma correction curve.  
Sets the R gamma correction curve.  
Sets the G gamma correction curve.  
Sets the B gamma correction curve.  
0
G GAMMA  
0
B GAMMA  
0
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
GAMMA SELECT  
STD/FILM  
STD  
3/1  
Selects the gamma table.  
GAMMA SEL (STD/  
FILM)  
1 to 6 (STD)  
1 to 5 (FILM)  
Selects the gamma table of STD/FILM.  
05  
BLK GAMMA  
BLACK GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns the black gamma correction on or off.  
Sets the range affected by black gamma.  
BLK GAMMA RANGE LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
MASTER BLK  
GAMMA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
0
Adjusts the master black gamma.  
R BLACK GAMMA  
G BLACK GAMMA  
B BLACK GAMMA  
TEST OUT SELECT  
0
Sets the correction curve of the R black  
gamma.  
0
Sets the correction curve of the G black  
gamma.  
0
Sets the correction curve of the B black  
gamma.  
ENC  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT  
connector.  
06  
KNEE  
KNEE  
OFF/ON  
ON  
85.0  
0
Turns the knee correction circuit on or off.  
Sets the knee point level.  
KNEE POINT  
50 to 109  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
KNEE SLOPE  
KNEE SATURATION  
KNEE SAT LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
Set the knee slope level.  
ON  
0
Turns the knee saturation function on or off.  
Sets the knee saturation level.  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the white clipping function on or off.  
Adjusts the white clipping level.  
WHITE CLIP LEVEL  
100.0 to 109.5% 109.0/  
105.0  
07  
DETAIL 1  
DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON  
ON  
Sets the detail correction function on or off.  
APERTURE  
Turns the aperture correction function on or  
off.  
DETAIL LEVEL  
APERTURE LVL  
DTL H/V RATIO  
CRISPENING  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Sets the general level of the detail signal.  
Sets the aperture level.  
0
0
Sets the level of the V detail signal.  
Sets the crispening level.  
0
LEVEL DEPEND  
LV. DEPEND LVL  
DETAIL FREQ.  
ON  
0
Turns the level depend function on or off.  
Sets the level of the level depend.  
Sets the frequency of the H detail signal.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Menu List  
147  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
Default Description  
08  
DETAIL 2  
KNEE APERTURE  
KNEE APT LVL  
DETAIL COMB  
OFF  
Turns the knee aperture function on or off.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to 0)  
0
0
Sets the knee aperture level.  
Sets the level at which the comb filter  
becomes effective.  
CROSS COLOR  
CROSS COLOR LVL  
DETAIL LIMIT  
ON/OFF  
OFF  
0
Turns the cross color component on or off.  
Sets the suppression level of the cross color.  
Sets the both detail black and white limiters.  
Sets the detail white limiter.  
(0 to 99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
DTL WHT LIMIT  
DTL BLK LIMIT  
DTL V-BLK LMT  
FINE DTL  
0
0
Sets the detail black limiter.  
0
Sets the V detail black limiter.  
09  
10  
DETAIL 3  
OFF  
0
Turns the fine detail function on or off.  
FINE DTL LVL  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the level at which the fine detail function  
becomes effective.  
V DTL CREATION  
NAM/G/R+G/Y  
R+G  
V
Selects the source signal of the V DTL signal.  
H/V CONTROL MODE H/V / V  
Select the operation mode of DETAIL H/V  
RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page.  
SKIN DETAIL  
SKIN DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on all of 1, 2 and 3 of the color detail  
function.  
SKIN DETECT  
EXEC  
EXEC  
OFF  
Executes the color detail function.  
SKIN AREA IND.  
OFF/ON  
Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area  
of the currently selected type of the color  
detail function.  
SKIN DTL SELECT  
SKIN DETAIL  
1/2/3  
1
Selects the type of the color detail function.  
The following items depend on the selected  
type of the color detail function.  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the color detail function on or off for the  
type selected in the above item.  
SKIN DETAIL LVL  
SKIN DTL SAT.  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the level of the color detail signal.  
Adjusts the saturation level of the hue  
possessed by the color detail function.  
SKIN DTL HUE  
SKIN DTL WIDTH  
MATRIX  
0 to 359  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
0
Adjusts the center phase of the hue  
possessed by the color detail function.  
0 to 359  
Adjusts the width of the hue possessed by the  
color detail function.  
11  
MTX LINEAR  
OFF/ON  
Turns the linear matrix correction and user-  
set matrix correction functions on or off.  
MATRIX (USER)  
MATRIX (PRESET)  
OFF/ON  
Turns the user-set matrix correction function  
on or off.  
OFF/ON  
Turns the preset matrix correction function on  
or off.  
MATRIX (USER)  
G-R  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX (USER)  
B-R  
0
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX (USER)  
R-G  
0
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX (USER)  
B-G  
0
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX (USER)  
R-B  
0
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MATRIX (USER)  
G-B  
0
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
148  
Menu List  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default Description  
12  
MTX MULTI  
MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the linear matrix correction and multi  
matrix correction functions on or off.  
MATRIX (MULTI)  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Turns the multi matrix correction function on  
or off.  
MATRIX AREA IND.  
Turns the zebra indication on or off in the area  
corresponding to the currently selected  
setting.  
MATRIX COLOR DET  
MTX (MULTI) AXIS  
EXEC  
B
Detects color.  
B/B+/MG-/MG/  
MG+/R/R+/YL-/  
YL/YL+/G-/G/  
G+/CY/CY+/B-  
Sets the region in which the multi matrix  
correction function can be changed. (sixteen-  
axis mode)  
MTX (MULTI) HUE  
MTX (MULTI) SAT  
(0 to 359)  
0
0
Adjusts the color phase affected by the multi  
matrix correction function in every sixteen-  
axis mode.  
(–99 to +99)  
Adjusts the saturation level affected by the  
multi matrix correction function in every  
sixteen-axis mode.  
13  
V
V MOD  
OFF/ON  
ON  
0
Turns the V modulation function on or off.  
MODULATION  
MASTER VMOD EX  
(–99 to +99)  
Turns the master V modulation function on or  
off.  
R VMOD  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC/R/G/B  
OFF/ON  
0
Turns the R V modulation function on or off.  
Turns the G V modulation function on or off.  
Turns the B V modulation function on or off.  
Selects the output signal of TEST OUT.  
Turns the low key saturation function on or off.  
G VMOD  
0
B VMOD  
0
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC  
ON  
0
14  
LOW KEY SAT. LOW KEY SAT.  
L.KEY SAT. LEVEL  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the saturation level of the low luminance  
part.  
L.KEY SAT. RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the low key  
saturation function becomes effective.  
Y BLACK GAMMA  
Y BLK GAM LEVEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the Y black gamma function on or off.  
(–99 to +99)  
Sets the gamma curve in the low luminance  
part.  
Y BLK GAM RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the Y black  
gamma becomes effective.  
15  
SCENE FILE  
1
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of  
the camcorder.  
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
Clears all current detail-adjusted settings and  
switch settings and returns the settings to the  
standard settings saved in the reference file.  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID  
Recalls the scene file from the memory of the  
camcorder or the “Memory Stick”.  
Stores the scene file in the memory of the  
camcorder or the “Memory Stick”.  
16 characters  
Sets the File ID.  
Menu List  
149  
       
MAINTENANCE Menu List  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
01  
WHT SHADING SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST  
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B WHT H PARA (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B WHT V SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B WHT V PARA (–99 to +99)  
WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON  
0
0
0
0
0
H Saw white shading compensation  
H Parabola white shading compensation  
V Saw white shading compensation  
V Parabola white shading compensation  
Turns white shading Saw and Parabola  
compensation on and off.  
02  
BLK SHADING SHADING CH SEL R/G/B/TEST  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
R/G/B BLK H SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B BLK H PARA (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B BLK V SAW (–99 to +99)  
R/G/B BLK V PARA (–99 to +99)  
BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON  
0
H Saw black shading compensation  
H Parabola black shading compensation  
V Saw black shading compensation  
V Parabola black shading compensation  
0
0
0
ON  
Turns black shading Saw and Parabola  
compensation on and off.  
MASTER BLACK  
(–99 to +99)  
0
Master black level adjustment  
MASTER  
GAIN(TMP)  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/  
24/30/36/42/48 dB  
0 db  
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value.  
03  
LEVEL ADJ  
ENC VIDEO LEVEL (–99 to +99)  
RGB LEVEL (–99 to +99)  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
0
Encoder video level adjustment  
R/G/B video level adjustment  
0
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
H BLANKING  
WIDTH  
(–99 to +99)  
0
H blanking width adjustment  
150  
Menu List  
       
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
04  
BATTERY  
BEFORE END 1  
5/10 to 95/100%  
5%  
Used when a BP-IL75/GL95/M100 Battery  
Pack is used. Sets the voltage warning level  
just before the battery ends.  
END 1  
0/1/2/3/4/5%  
0%  
Used when a BP-IL75/GL95/M100 Battery  
Pack is used. Sets the voltage level at which  
the battery ends and the camcorder stops  
operation, just before the battery ends.  
BEFORE END 2  
END 2  
11.5 to 17.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
11.5  
11.0  
Used when a BP-L60A Battery Pack is used.  
Sets the voltage warning level just before the  
battery ends.  
11.0 to 11.5 V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
Used when a BP-L60A Battery Pack is used.  
Sets the voltage level at which the battery  
ends and the camcorder stops operation, just  
before the battery ends.  
BEFORE END 3  
END3  
11.5 to 17.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
11.8  
11.0  
Used when a battery pack other than a BP-  
L60A/IL75/GL95/M100 or an external power  
connected to the DC IN connector is used.  
Sets the voltage warning level just before the  
battery ends.  
11.0 to 11.5 V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
Used when a battery pack other than a BP-  
L60A/IL75/GL95/M100 or an external power  
connected to the DC IN connector is used.  
Sets the voltage level at which the battery  
ends and the camcorder stops operation, just  
before the battery ends.  
05  
AUDIO-1  
CA-701 AUDIO IN  
ENABL/DSABL  
CH1/2/SW  
OFF/ON  
ENABL  
SW  
Selects whether the camera adaptor is  
enabled to use or not enabled.  
ENABL: Camera adaptor can be used.  
DSABL: Camera adaptor cannot be used.  
AUDIO CH3/4  
MODE  
Selects the sources to be recorded to  
channels CH-3/4.CH1/2: Same sources as  
CH-1/2.SW: Signals selected by the AUDIO  
IN CH-3/CH-4 switches.  
REAR XLR AUTO  
FRONT MIC REF  
REAR MIC REF  
MIN ALARM VOL  
OFF  
Turns the XLR connection automatic  
detection on or off .  
–60dB/–50dB/  
–40dB  
–60dB  
–60dB  
OFF  
Sets the reference level of the front  
microphone.  
–60dB/–50dB/  
–40dB  
Sets the reference level when the AUDIO IN  
CH1 connector is set to MIC.  
OFF/SET  
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone  
when it is turned all the way down.  
OFF: Almost inaudible.  
SET: Faintly audible.  
SP ATT LEVEL  
OFF/3/6/9 dB  
OFF  
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker.  
Has no effect on earphone volume.  
HEADPHONE OUT STREO/MONO  
MONO  
Selects whether to make the rear earphone  
monaural or stereo.  
Menu List  
151  
   
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
06  
AUDIO-2  
AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16 bit//24 bit  
(PDW-530/530P  
only)  
16bit  
Sets the bit length of the digital audio  
recording.  
AU REF LEVEL  
–20/–18/–16/  
–12 dB  
–20 dB  
Sets the reference level (Head Room).  
Sets the output reference level.  
AU REC OUT  
0/+4/–3 dB  
0 dB  
AU CH12 AGC  
MODE  
MONO/STREO  
MONO  
Turns automatic adjustment of the input level  
of analog audio signals to be recorded on  
channel 1 and 2 on or off.  
AU CH34 AGC  
MODE  
OFF/MONO/  
STREO  
MONO  
Turns automatic adjustment of the input level  
of analog audio signals to be recorded on  
channel 3 and 4 on or off.  
AU AGC SPEC  
–6/–9/–12/–15 dB  
–6 dB  
AU OUT LIMITER  
MODE  
OFF/–6/–9/–12/–15 OFF  
dB  
Selects the limiter function for loud input  
signals for manual audio input level  
adjustment.  
AU OUT LIMITER  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the limiter on or off.  
I.LINK AUDIO OUT 2CH/4CH  
2CH  
2CH: Output channels 1 and 2 (16 bits, 48  
ksps)  
4CH: Output channels 1 to 4 (12 bits, 32  
ksps)  
152  
Menu List  
 
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
07  
AUDIO-3  
AU SG (1kHz)  
ON/OFF/AUTO  
OFF  
Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test tone  
during the Color Bar mode or not.  
ON: a 1 kHz test tone is output during the  
Color Bar mode.  
OFF: a 1 kHz test tone is not output during  
the Color Bar mode.  
AUTO: a 1 kHz test tone is output only when  
the CH 1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the  
inside panel is in the AUTO position.  
MIC CH1 LEVEL  
SIDE1/FRONT/  
F+S1  
FRONT  
FRONT  
SIDE 1  
When recording the front microphone sound  
on CH 1, selects which control is to be used  
for the level adjustment.  
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
MIC CH2 LEVEL  
SIDE2/FRONT/  
F+S2  
When recording the front microphone sound  
on CH 2, selects which control is to be used  
for the level adjustment.  
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
REAR1/WRR  
LEVEL  
SIDE1/FRONT/  
F+S1  
Selects any of these controls to adjust the  
audio level of the equipment that is connected  
to the wireless microphone and whatever is  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector  
on the rear panel.  
SIDE 1: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (left  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S1: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (left side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
REAR2/WRR  
LEVEL  
SIDE2/FRONT/  
F+S2  
SIDE 2  
Selects any of these controls to adjust the  
audio level of the equipment that is connected  
to the wireless microphone and whatever is  
connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector  
on the rear panel.  
SIDE 2: Adjust it with the LEVEL control (right  
side) on the side panel.  
FRONT: Adjust it with the MIC LEVEL control  
on the front panel.  
F + S2: It can be adjusted using either the  
LEVEL control (right side) or the MIC  
LEVEL control. (The two controls are  
linked to each other.)  
Menu List  
153  
 
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
08  
TIMECODE  
TC OUT  
AUTO/GENE  
AUTO  
Selects the time code signal output.  
AUTO: Outputs the time code generator  
output during recording and outputs the  
time code reader output during playback.  
GENE: Outputs the time code generator  
output during recording and playback.  
DF/NDF  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
DF/NDF  
INT/EXT  
DF  
Sets DF or NDF mode.  
DF: Drop frame mode  
NDF: Non drop frame mode  
EXT-LK DF/NDF  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
INT  
Selects either internal setting or external  
setting for DF/NDF.  
INT: Internal  
EXT: External  
EXT-LK UBIT  
INT/EXT  
INT  
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks  
to an INT or an EXT source when the time  
code is locked to an external source.  
INT: Internal lock  
EXT: External lock  
LTC UBIT  
FIX/TIME  
FIX/TIME  
FIX  
FIX  
ON  
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of LTC.  
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.  
TIME: Records the present time.  
VITC UBIT  
Sets the data to be recorded in UBIT of VITC.  
FIX: Records the data that is set by the user.  
TIME: Records the present time.  
WATCH AUTO ADJ OFF/ON  
Matches the time of the built-in clock with the  
time data of the user bits of an external time  
code. Turns the automatic time correction  
function of the built-in clock on or off .  
UBIT GROUP ID  
VITC INS LINE 1  
000/101  
000  
Selects the UBIT GROUP ID.  
12 to 19 H (PDW-  
510/530)  
16H  
Selects the line into which VITC is to be  
inserted.  
9 to 22 H (PDW-  
510P/530P)  
19h  
18h  
21H  
ON  
VITC INS LINE 2  
12 to 19 H (PDW-  
510/530)  
Selects the line into which VITC is to be  
inserted.  
9 to 22 H (PDW-  
510P/530P)  
09  
VDR MODE  
REC TALLY BLINK OFF/ON  
Turns the tally illumination control on or off in  
the event of BATTERY BEFORE END/DISC  
BEFORE END.  
REC START/BEEP OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on or off the alarm sound at REC  
START/STOP.  
SUB LCD MODE  
SEL  
TIMER/OFF/CONT TIMER  
Sets the time code (TC) display after power-  
off as follows.  
TIMER: The TC display turns off after the  
elapse of the time set by the TIMER SET  
below.  
OFF: Not displayed.  
CONT: Displayed.  
SUB LCD TIMER  
1H/3H/8H  
1H  
Sets the duration of time after which the TC  
display is to be turned off after power-off,  
when the MODE SELECT item, above, is set  
to TIMER (H: hours).  
REC FORMAT  
(PDW-530/530P  
only)  
IMX50/IMX40/  
IMX30/DVCAM  
IMX50  
Selects the type of video codec. Multiple  
codecs cannot be mixed on one disc.  
154  
Menu List  
   
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Default  
OFF  
Description  
10  
ESSENCE  
MARK  
SHOT MARK 1  
SHOT MARK 2  
FLASH MARK  
OFF  
OFF  
LOUDLY VOICE  
MARK  
OFF  
GAIN MARK  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
FILTER POS MARK OFF/ON  
SHUTTER MARK  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
WHITE SWITCH  
MARK  
11  
PRESET WHT  
COLOR TEMP. <P> Display color  
temperature.  
3200  
White balance preset value  
COLOR FINE <P> (–99 to +99)  
0
R GAIN  
G GAIN  
D5600  
<P> (–99 to +99)  
<P> (–99 to +99)  
OFF/ON  
0
R gain preset value  
G gain preset value  
0
OFF  
Selects whether to electrically apply 5600K  
filter to white balance preset value.  
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF/ON  
OFF  
DCC  
Turns on and off the function which  
automatically acquires the preset value for  
automatic white balance adjustment.  
12  
DCC ADJUST  
DCC FUNCTION  
SEL  
DCC/ADP. K/FIX  
Selects the function assigned to the DCC  
switch.  
ADP.K is Adaptive Knee and FIX is fixed  
value.  
DCC D RANGE  
400/450/500/550/  
600%  
600%  
Sets the timing range when the DCC switch is  
set to the ON position.  
DCC POINT  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
0
DCC minimum knee point adjustment  
Gain adjustment to DCC detected value  
DCC reaction speed adjustment  
DCC GAIN  
DCC DELAY TIME  
Menu List  
155  
     
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
13  
AUTO IRIS 2  
IRIS WINDOW  
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR  
1
Selects the auto iris detection window. VAR is  
variable.  
IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which displays a  
frame marker for the auto iris detection  
window.  
IRIS LEVEL  
(–99 to +99)  
0
0
Level adjustment of the auto iris target value  
IRIS APL RATIO  
(–99 to +99)  
Mix ratio of auto iris detection peak value and  
average value  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS.  
20 to 465  
245  
72  
0
Width and height of detection frame when the  
auto iris detection window is set to VAR  
20 to 172  
Height of detection frame when the auto iris  
detection window is set to VAR  
–447 to +446  
(PDW-510/530)  
Horizontal position of detection frame when  
the auto iris detection window is set to VAR  
–447 to +446  
0
(PDW-510P/530P)  
IRIS VAR V POS.  
–104 to +104  
(PDW-510/530)  
0
Vertical position of detection frame when the  
auto iris detection window is set to VAR  
–124 to +123  
0
(PDW-510P/530P)  
IRIS SPEED  
1/2/3/4/5  
OFF/ON  
2
Auto iris speed adjustment  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which, during  
auto iris adjustment, ignores very bright areas  
by dulling the reaction to high luminescence.  
14  
FUNCTION 3  
WHT FILTER INH  
COLOR BAR SEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which inhibits  
independent white memory for each filter  
position.  
SMPTE/EBU/SNG SMPTE  
Color bar type  
(PDW-  
510/530)  
EBU  
(PDW-  
510P/  
530P)  
COLOR VF INPUT COMP/VBS/BOTH COMP  
Video input selection when a color viewfinder  
is used  
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
Show only USER menu in the top menu.  
RM COMMON  
MEMORY  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not to share settings for  
when an RM remote control unit is connected  
and when the unit is used alone.  
RM REC START  
RM/CAM/PARA  
RM  
When an RM remote control unit is  
connected, selects which REC START/STOP  
buttons are enabled. RM/camera/both.  
EXT VTR REC CTL OFF/ON  
OFF  
Selects whether or not to control recording by  
an external VTR.  
15  
GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
ON  
OFF  
0
Turns genlock on and off.  
Turns return video on and off.  
Genlock H phase setting.  
RETURN VIDEO  
GL H PHASE  
(–60 to +139)  
(PDW-510/530)  
(–59 to +142)  
0
(PDW-510P/530P)  
GL SC 0/180 SEL  
0/180  
180  
Genlock subcarrier phase setting  
156  
Menu List  
     
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
Description  
16  
ND COMP  
ND OFFSET  
ADJUST  
OFF/ON  
Turns on and off the mode which sets ND  
(neutral density) filter color compensation  
values.  
CLEAR ND  
OFFSET  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Clears ND filter color compensation values.  
Execute the auto black shooting function.  
Clears black shooting compensation values.  
17  
18  
AUTO SHADING AUTO BLK  
SHADING  
EXEC  
RESET BLK SHD  
EXEC  
EXEC  
ENC  
TEST OUT SELECT ENC/R/G/B  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
MASTER GAIN  
(TMP)  
–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/  
24/30/36/42/48dB  
0dB  
Temporarily sets the master gain value.  
DISC  
DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC  
DELETE ALL CLIPS EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Deletes final clip.  
Deletes all clips.  
Formats the disc.  
QUICK FORMAT  
EXEC  
Menu List  
157  
     
FILE Menu List  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
FILE menu.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
When the setting range in the Settings column is  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Description  
01  
USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
16 characters  
USER PRESET  
EXEC  
02  
USER FILE2 STORE USR PRESET  
CLEAR USR PRESET  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
OFF  
Sets the pages registered in the USER menu  
to the standard setting.  
Clears the standard setting of pages registered  
in the USER menu.  
CUSTOMIZE RESET  
Returns the pages registered in the USER  
menu to the factory default state.  
LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF/ON  
Selects whether to include pages registered by  
the user in user files to be loaded by USER  
FILE LOAD.  
LOAD OUT OF USER  
BEFORE FILE PAGE  
USER LOAD WHITE  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
Selects whether to include pages not  
registered by the user in user files loaded by  
USER FILE LOAD.  
Selects whether to include data after USER  
FILE pages in user files to be loaded by USER  
FILE LOAD.  
Selects whether to include white balance data  
in user files to be loaded by USER FILE LOAD.  
03  
ALL FILE  
ALL FILE LOAD  
ALL FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Load ALL file.  
Save ALL file.  
16 characters  
Name ALL file.  
ALL PRESET  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
OFF  
Return items in ALL file to preset values.  
Set preset values of items in ALL file.  
Clear preset values of items in ALL file.  
STORE ALL PRESET  
CLEAR ALL PRESET  
3SEC CLR PRESET  
OFF/ON  
Turns on and off the function which returns  
menu items to the preset values when the  
MENU knob is kept pressed for 3 seconds.  
NETWORK DATA  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Selects whether or not to read in the network-  
related data.  
04  
SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F. ID  
EXEC  
EXEC  
16 characters  
158  
Menu List  
           
No.  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Description  
05  
REFERENCE REFERENCE STORE  
REFERENCE CLEAR  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
F. ID  
Save reference file in internal memory.  
Clear reference file.  
Load reference file.  
Save reference file to “Memory Stick”.  
Name reference file.  
16 characters  
OFF/ON  
SCENE WHITE DATA  
OFF  
06  
07  
LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL  
LENS FILE STORE  
F. ID  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Load lens file.  
Save lens file.  
Name lens file.  
Clear lens file.  
16 characters  
LENS NO OFFSET  
SOURCE  
MEMORY1 Number of selected lens file  
IRIS GAIN  
0
Iris gain value of lens file  
Lens file V Saw seed  
LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD  
LENS CENTER H  
(–99 to +99)  
–466 to +465  
0
Horizontal position compensation of lens file  
center marker  
LENS CENTER V  
–121 to +120  
0
Vertical position compensation of lens file  
center marker  
TEST OUT SELECT  
LENS R FLARE  
LENS G FLARE  
LENS B FLARE  
LENS W-R OFST  
ENC/R/G/B  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
ENC  
Selects signal output to TEST OUT connector.  
Adjustment of lens file flare (R)  
0
0
0
0
Adjustment of lens file flare (G)  
Adjustment of lens file flare (B)  
R compensation value when extender and  
shrinker used.  
LENS W-B OFST  
(–99 to +99)  
R/G/B/TEST  
0
B compensation value when extender and  
shrinker used.  
08  
LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL  
R
Selects the channel adjusted by this menu. If  
TEST is selected, the setting is the same as  
the setting of TEST OUT SELECT.  
TEST OUT SELECT  
ENC/R/G/B  
ENC  
Selects the signal output to the TEST OUT  
connector.  
LENS R/G/B H SAW  
LENS R/G/B H PARA  
LENS R/G/B V SAW  
LENS R/G/B V PARA  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
(–99 to +99)  
0
H Saw white shading compensation  
H Parabola white shading compensation  
V Saw white shading compensation  
V Parabola white shading compensation  
Format “Memory Stick”.  
0
0
0
09  
MEMORY  
STICK  
FORMAT  
MS IN > JUMP TO  
OFF/USER/  
ALL/SCENE/  
LENS/REFER/  
USER1  
See 7-3 “Jumping to a File-Related Menu Page  
112.  
Menu List  
159  
           
DIAGNOSIS Menu List  
The following table lists and describes the items in the  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
No.  
Page  
Item  
Description  
01  
HOURS METER  
OPERATION  
OPERATION (rst)  
SPINDLE (rst)  
LASER (rst)  
LOADING (rst)  
SEEK (rst)  
02  
TIME/DATE  
ADJUST  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
03  
04  
ROM VERSION 1  
AT: Ver X.XX  
SYS1: Ver X.XX  
SYS2K: Ver X.XX  
SYS2U: Ver X.XX  
DRIVE: Ver X.XX  
FP: Ver X.XX  
VAIN: Ver X.XX  
PIER: Ver X.. XX  
PRX.V: Ver X.XX  
PRX.A: Ver X.XX  
A.DSP: Ver X.XX  
I/O EEPROM LSI NVRAM SCI  
SDI OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT  
Displays ROM version.  
ROM VERSION 2  
05  
06  
DEV STATUS-1  
OPTION BOARD  
Displays installed options.  
PULL DOWN (24P)  
(PDW-510/530 only)  
NETWORK ADAPTER  
GPS UNIT  
160  
Menu List  
               
Before using a “Memory Stick”  
About a “Memory Stick”  
Terminal  
What is “Memory Stick”?  
Write-protected tab  
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile  
IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data  
capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is  
specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data  
among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is  
removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external  
data storage.  
Labelling position  
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure prevention  
switch to “LOCK,” data cannot be recorded, edited, or  
erased.  
• Data may be damaged if:  
-You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit  
while it is reading or writing data.  
-You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to the  
effects of static electricity or electric noise.  
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of  
important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.  
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes: standard size  
and compact “Memory Stick Duo” size. Once attached to  
a “Memory Stick Duo” adapter, “Memory Stick Duo”  
turns to the same size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus  
can be used with products compliant with standard  
“Memory Stick”.”  
Types of “Memory Stick”  
“Memory Stick” is available in the following four types to  
meet various requirements in functions.  
Notes  
“Memory Stick-R”  
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to  
the “Memory Stick” labeling position.  
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the  
labeling position.  
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.  
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with  
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.  
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.  
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that  
is:  
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write data to  
“Memory Stick-R” with “Memory Stick-R” compatible  
products only. Copyright protected data that requires  
MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be  
written to “Memory Stick-R.”  
“Memory Stick”  
Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data  
that requires the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
“MagicGate Memory Stick”  
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun  
- Under direct sunlight  
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances  
“Memory Stick-ROM”  
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on  
“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.  
“Memory Stick” Access Indicator  
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is  
being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this  
time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them  
to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and  
product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage  
the data.  
Available types of “Memory Stick”  
You can use a “Memory Stick” with your product.  
Note  
You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your product.  
Note on data read/write speed  
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the  
combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick”  
compliant product you use.  
What is MagicGate ?  
MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses  
encryption technology.  
About a “Memory Stick”  
161  
     
Precautions  
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In  
no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.  
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the  
provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory  
Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the  
material has been recorded in accordance with copyright  
and other applicable laws.  
• The “Memory Stick” application software may be  
modified or changed by Sony without prior notice.  
• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage  
performances and other entertainment events, even if  
they are recorded for personal use only.  
“Memory Stick” and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
162  
About a “Memory Stick”  
Disc  
Index  
B
Basic procedures  
A
Access indicator(for "MemoryStick")  
Adjusting  
used for recording and playback  
47  
Disc status  
Battery status  
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation  
display on the monochrome LCD  
43  
Adjustments and settings  
Assigning functions to ASSIGN 1/2/3/  
Black balance  
E
F
attaching a UHF portable tuner  
File ID  
C
connecting line input audio  
using the supplied microphone  
Checking  
adjustment for input from the front  
the last two seconds of the  
recording 52  
the recording on the color video  
monitor 52  
G
adjustment for inputs from the  
connectors 70  
AUDIO SELECT CH-1/CH-2  
D
H
Index  
163  
 
resetting USER menu settings  
101  
setting the color temperature  
manually 95  
using the Anton Bauer Ultralight  
system 114  
I
i.LINK DV IN/OUT S400 connector  
32  
K
specifying an offset for the auto  
white balance setting 96  
L
R
Recommended additional equipment  
UHF potrable tuner for wireless  
system 121  
using the supplied microphone  
119  
video signals from external  
Recording format  
setting the audio recording format  
Loading  
setting the video recording format  
user files from a “Memory Stick”  
103  
N
Resetting USER menu settings to the  
Locations and functions of parts and  
controls 23  
O
Optical disc drive section,  
specifications 138  
M
“Memory Stick”  
Optional board  
S
jumping to a file-related menu  
page 112  
Saving and loading  
user files to and from a “Memory  
Stick” 103  
Scene file  
P
PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator  
33  
resetting the settings to the  
standard settings 111  
Selecting  
assigning functions to ASSIGN 1/  
2/3/4 switches 96  
164  
Index  
Setting  
Time code  
Shot data superimposed on the  
color bars 89  
W
Shooting  
Warnings and indications on the LCDs  
Time code display  
basic procedure (from adjusting  
the black balance and  
white balance to stopping  
recording) 50  
basic procedure (from turning on  
a disc) 49  
White balance  
specifying an offset for the auto  
testing the camcorder before  
shooting 129  
U
USER menu  
Shooting and recording/playback  
functions 28  
Shoulder pad, adjusting the position  
125  
Z
V
Status displayontheviewfinderscreen  
84  
Video camera section, specifications  
137  
adjusting the focus and screen  
115  
moving the viewfinder shoe up  
116  
T
Testing  
using the BKW-401 Viewfinder  
Rotation Bracket 117  
Viewfinderfront-rearpositioninglever  
29  
Viewfinder screen  
Index  
165  
166  
Index  
The material contained in this manual consists of information  
that is the property of Sony Corporation and is intended solely  
for use by the purchasers of the equipment described in this  
manual.  
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any  
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose other  
than the operation or maintenance of the equipment described  
in this manual without the express written permission of Sony  
Corporation.  
Sony Corporation  
PDW-510/510P/530/530P  
(SYL)  
B& PCompany  
3-805-941-01 (1)  
http://www.sony.net/  
© 2004  

Westcott PokerLite 7051 User Manual
Sony XR 3750 User Manual
Sony HANDYCAM PJ10 User Manual
Sony Handycam DCR SX63E User Manual
Sony Camcorder HDR CX220 User Manual
Sony Blu ray Player BDV E370 User Manual
SkyLink TOTAL PROTECTION ALARM SYSTEM SC 10 User Manual
Sharp XE A20S User Manual
Sharp Blu ray Player BDHP25U User Manual
Sanyo Xacti VPC CG6 User Manual